| all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| manual |
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.66 MiB | February 01 2013 | |||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | External Photos | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Internal Photos | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Setup Photos | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Report | March 09 2014 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Attestation Statements | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | External Photos | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Internal Photos | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Report | February 01 2013 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Setup Photos | February 01 2013 |
| 1 2 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.66 MiB | February 01 2013 |
P-660HN-Tx v2 Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway P-660HN-TxA v2 Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway Default Login Details LAN IP Address User Name Password http://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Version 2.00 Edition 1, 3/2012 www.zyxel.com www.zyxel.com Copyright 2012 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or options in this guide may not be available in your product. Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guid shows how to connect the ADSL Router and access the Web Configurator wizards. (See the wizard real time help for information on configuring each screen.) It also contains a connection diagram and package contents list. 2 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................13 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................15 Introducing the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................................21 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................27 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................55 Connection Status and System Info Screens ..........................................................................................57 Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................63 Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................79 Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................109 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................123 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................127 Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................139 Port Binding ...........................................................................................................................................149 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................153 Filters ....................................................................................................................................................155 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................161 Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................179 Certificate ..............................................................................................................................................183 Logs .....................................................................................................................................................189 Traffic Status .........................................................................................................................................191 User Account .........................................................................................................................................195 TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................197 System Settings ....................................................................................................................................201 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................205 Backup/Restore .....................................................................................................................................207 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................ 211 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................223 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................227 Product Specifications ...........................................................................................................................231 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 3 Contents Overview 4 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 13 Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................15 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15 1.2 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router ...................................................................................................15 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ADSL Router ....................................................................................15 1.4 Applications for the ADSL Router .....................................................................................................16 1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................16 1.4.2 Wireless Access ......................................................................................................................16 1.4.3 Using the WPS/WLAN Button .................................................................................................17 1.5 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................18 1.5.1 Using the Reset Button ............................................................................................................19 1.6 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router ...................................................................................................19 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................................21 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................21 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout ...........................................................................................................22 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................23 2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................24 2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................24 Chapter 3 Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................27 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27 3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection ......................................................................................................27 3.3 IPv6 Address Configuration ..............................................................................................................30 3.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................30 3.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................31 3.4.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................32 3.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your ADSL Router ...........................................................................35 3.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access ..................................37 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 3.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server ................................................................................38 3.6.1 Port Forwarding .......................................................................................................................39 3.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service ...................................................................40 3.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................43 3.9 Port Binding Configuration ................................................................................................................45 3.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections .............................................................45 3.9.2 Configuring Port Binding ..........................................................................................................48 3.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic ................................................................................................49 3.11 Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using DDNS ................................................................53 3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................................53 3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router ..............................................................................54 3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................................54 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 55 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens ..................................................................................57 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57 4.2 The Connection Status Screen .........................................................................................................57 4.3 The System Info Screen ....................................................................................................................58 Chapter 5 Broadband...........................................................................................................................................63 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................63 5.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ...................................................................................63 5.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ......................................................................................63 5.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................64 5.2 The Internet Connection Screen .......................................................................................................64 5.2.1 Advanced Setup ......................................................................................................................67 5.3 The More Connections Screen .........................................................................................................69 5.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................................70 5.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup .....................................................................72 5.4 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................................73 5.4.1 Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................73 5.4.2 Multiplexing ..............................................................................................................................74 5.4.3 VPI and VCI .............................................................................................................................74 5.4.4 IP Address Assignment ...........................................................................................................74 5.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ...................................................................................................75 5.4.6 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................75 5.5 Traffic Shaping ..................................................................................................................................75 5.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes .................................................................................................................76 6 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................79 Table of Contents 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................79 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens .....................................................................79 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................................80 6.1.3 Before You Start .......................................................................................................................80 6.2 The General Screen ..........................................................................................................................80 6.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................82 6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................82 6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................83 6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................84 6.3 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................................86 6.3.1 More AP Edit ...........................................................................................................................86 6.4 The MAC Authentication Screen .......................................................................................................88 6.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................89 6.6 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................90 6.7 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................................92 6.8 The Scheduling Screen .....................................................................................................................92 6.9 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................93 6.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference .................................................................................................95 6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ...................................................................................................95 6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms .....................................................................................................96 6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................96 6.10.4 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................................99 6.10.5 BSS .......................................................................................................................................99 6.10.6 MBSSID ...............................................................................................................................100 6.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ...................................................................................100 6.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................100 Chapter 7 Home Networking .............................................................................................................................109 7.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................109 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ..................................................................................109 7.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................109 7.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................... 111 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen ................................................................................................................... 111 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen ................................................................................................................. 113 7.4 The UPnP Screen ........................................................................................................................... 114 7.5 The IP Alias Screen ........................................................................................................................ 114 7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen .....................................................................................115 7.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen ........................................................................................................... 115 7.7 Home Networking Technical Reference .......................................................................................... 119 7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the ADSL Router ....................................................................................... 119 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 7.7.2 DHCP Setup .......................................................................................................................... 119 7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses ......................................................................................................... 119 7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................120 7.7.5 RIP Setup ..............................................................................................................................121 7.7.6 Multicast ................................................................................................................................121 Chapter 8 Static Route.......................................................................................................................................123 8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................123 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ......................................................................124 8.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................124 8.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit ...........................................................................................................124 8.3 IPv6 Static Route .............................................................................................................................125 8.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit ..........................................................................................................126 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................127 9.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................127 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ..................................................................................127 9.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS .....................................................................................128 9.2 The Quality of Service General Screen ...........................................................................................128 9.3 The Queue Screen ..........................................................................................................................129 9.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................130 9.4 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................................131 9.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit .............................................................................................................131 9.5 The QoS Game List Screen ...........................................................................................................135 9.6 QoS Technical Reference ...............................................................................................................136 9.6.1 IEEE 802.1p ..........................................................................................................................136 9.6.2 IP Precedence .......................................................................................................................136 9.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment ...................................................................................137 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................139 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................139 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ................................................................................139 10.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ..................................................................................139 10.2 The NAT General Screen ..............................................................................................................140 10.3 The Port Forwarding Screen .........................................................................................................141 10.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen .............................................................................141 10.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit ............................................................................................142 10.4 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................144 10.5 NAT Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................144 10.5.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................144 8 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table of Contents 10.5.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................145 10.5.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................................145 10.5.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................146 10.5.5 NAT Mapping Types ............................................................................................................146 Chapter 11 Port Binding ......................................................................................................................................149 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................149 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens ....................................................................150 11.2 The Port Binding General Screen .................................................................................................150 11.3 The Port Binding Screen ...............................................................................................................150 11.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen .............................................................................................151 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................153 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................153 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...............................................................................153 12.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...............................................................................153 12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................153 Chapter 13 Filters .................................................................................................................................................155 13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................155 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens ...............................................................................155 13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering .............................................................................155 13.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen .............................................................................................................155 13.3 IPv6/MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................157 Chapter 14 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................161 14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................161 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ...........................................................................161 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ..............................................................................162 14.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................................164 14.3 The Default Action Screen ............................................................................................................165 14.4 The Rules Screen .........................................................................................................................166 14.4.1 The Rules Add Screen ........................................................................................................167 14.4.2 Customized Services ..........................................................................................................169 14.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit .............................................................................................170 14.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................172 14.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen .................................................................................................172 14.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds ..........................................................................................173 14.6 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................................174 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 14.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................................174 14.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................................175 14.6.3 Security Considerations .......................................................................................................176 14.6.4 Triangle Route .....................................................................................................................176 Chapter 15 Parental Control................................................................................................................................179 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179 15.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................179 15.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule ............................................................................................180 Chapter 16 Certificate ..........................................................................................................................................183 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................183 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................183 16.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................183 16.3 Local Certificates ...........................................................................................................................183 16.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................185 16.5 Trusted CA Import .......................................................................................................................185 16.6 View Certificate .............................................................................................................................186 Chapter 17 Logs ..................................................................................................................................................189 17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................189 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................189 17.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................189 17.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................190 Chapter 18 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................191 18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................191 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................191 18.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................191 18.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................192 18.4 The NAT Screen ............................................................................................................................193 Chapter 19 User Account ....................................................................................................................................195 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................195 19.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................195 Chapter 20 TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................197 10 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table of Contents 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................197 20.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................197 Chapter 21 System Settings................................................................................................................................201 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................201 21.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .............................................................201 21.2 The System Screen .......................................................................................................................201 21.3 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................201 Chapter 22 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................205 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................205 22.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................205 Chapter 23 Backup/Restore ................................................................................................................................207 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207 23.2 The Backup/Restore Screen .........................................................................................................207 23.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................209 Chapter 24 Remote Management........................................................................................................................ 211 24.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 211 24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens .................................................... 211 24.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management ........................................................212 24.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................................212 24.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen .............................................................................................212 24.3 The Telnet Screen .........................................................................................................................214 24.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................................214 24.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................215 24.5.1 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................216 24.6 The DNS Screen ..........................................................................................................................217 24.7 The ICMP Screen ..........................................................................................................................218 24.8 The SSH Screen ...........................................................................................................................219 24.8.1 SSH Example ......................................................................................................................220 Chapter 25 Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................223 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................223 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................................223 25.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................223 25.3 The DSL Line Screen ....................................................................................................................224 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 11 Table of Contents Chapter 26 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................227 26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................227 26.2 ADSL Router Access and Login ....................................................................................................228 26.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................229 Chapter 27 Product Specifications.....................................................................................................................231 27.1 Hardware Specifications ................................................................................................................231 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address.......................................................................233 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................253 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................261 Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................269 Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................283 Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................293 Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................297 Index ..................................................................................................................................................301 12 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide PART I Users Guide 13 14 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview The P-660HN-Tx v2/P-660HN-TxA v2 are ADSL2+ routers. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared Internet access. The ADSL Router is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering. Please refer to the following description of the product name format. H denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch). N denotes 802.11n. The N models support 802.11n wireless connection mode. Models with 1, for example P-660HN-T1 v2, denote a device that works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). Models with 3 denote a device that works over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) or T-ISDN (UR-2). Only use firmware for your ADSL Routers specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ADSL Router. Note: Not all models have all of the features shown in this Users Guide. 1.2 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router Use any of the following methods to manage the ADSL Router. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ADSL Router using a
(supported) web browser. Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ADSL Router Do the following things regularly to make the ADSL Router more secure and to manage the ADSL Router more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the ADSL Router to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ADSL Router. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 Applications for the ADSL Router Here are some example uses for which the ADSL Router is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your ADSL Router provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the ADSL Routers Ethernet ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 ADSL Routers Router Features LAN WAN DSL You can also configure firewall and filtering feature on the ADSL Router for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or Yahoo Messenger. You can also configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the ADSL Router gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the bosss excessive file downloading. 1.4.2 Wireless Access The ADSL Router is a wireless Access Point (AP) for IEEE 802.11b/g/n compliant clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to 16 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can set up a wireless network with WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) or manually add a client to your wireless network. Figure 2 Wireless Access Example Chapter 1 Introduction 1.4.3 Using the WPS/WLAN Button By default, the wireless network on the ADSL Router is turned on. To turn it off, simply press the WPS/WLAN button on top of the device for over 5 seconds. When the WPS/WLAN LED is green, the wireless network is active. You can also use the WPS/WLAN button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the ADSL Router and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:
1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. 2 Press the WPS/WLAN button for 1-5 seconds and release it. See below for WPS button location. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the ADSL Router. The WPS/
WLAN LED should flash while the ADSL Router sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS/WLAN LED shines green. 1.5 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the user name and password will be reset to the default. 18 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 1.5.1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.6 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router Use any of the following methods to manage the ADSL Router. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ADSL Router using a
(supported) web browser. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction 20 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator, you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 261 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your ADSL Router hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 4 Launch your web browser. Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. A password screen displays. Type admin (default) as the username and 1234 as the password, and click Login. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 3 Password Screen Note: For security reasons, the ADSL Router automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the Connection Status screen if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 4 Change Password Screen 6 The Connection Status screen appears. Figure 5 Connection Status 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen, where you can view the ADSL Routers interface and system information. 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout Click Connection Status > System Info to show the following screen. 22 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 6 Web Configurator Layout Screen A B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner. Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen, the System Info screen is displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 58 for more information about the System Info screen. If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen, the Connection Status screen appears. See Chapter 4 on page 57 for more information about the Connection Status screen. If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the ADSL Routers ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ADSL Router features. The following table describes each menu item. Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status TAB FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the ADSL Router and computers/devices connected to it. Network Setting Broadband Internet Connection Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties. More Connections Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections. Wireless General Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off, specify the SSID(s) and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ADSL Router. MAC Authentication WPS WDS WMM Scheduling Advanced Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the ADSL Router. Use this screen to use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to establish a wireless connection. Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to configure when the ADSL Router enables or disables the wireless LAN. Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings such as output power. 24 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB LAN Setup Home Networking Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator FUNCTION Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. IP Alias UPnP IPv6 LAN Setup Static Route Static Route Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into dfferent logical networks. Use this screen to enable the UPnP function. Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the ADSL Routers LAN interface. Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ADSL Router. IPv6 Static Route Use this screen to configure IPv6 static routes. QoS General NAT Queue Class Setup Game List General Port Forwarding DMZ Port Binding General Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games. Use this screen to activate/deactivate NAT. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to activate/deactivate port binding. Port Binding Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Security Filter IP/MAC Filter IPv6/MAC Filter Firewall General Default Action Rules Dos Parental Control Parental Control Use this screen to configure IPv4/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use this screen to configure IPv6/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. Use this screen to set the thresholds that the ADSL Router uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that are not fully established (half-open sessions). Use this screen to define time periods and days during which the ADSL Router performs parental control and/or block web sites with the specific URL. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB Local Certificates Certificates FUNCTION Use this screen to export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the ADSL Routers CA-signed certificates. Trusted CA Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ADSL Router. System Monitor Log Log Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT Maintenance Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected. You can export or e-mail the logs. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the ADSL Router. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the ADSL Router. Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the ADSL Router. Users Account Users Account Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts. TR-069 Client TR-069 Client System System Use this screen to configure the ADSL Router to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). Use this screen to configure management inactivity time-out setting. Time Time Setting Use this screen to change your ADSL Routers time and date. Log Setting Log Setting Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your device is to record. You can also set it to e-mail the logs to you. Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Reboot Reboot RemoteMGMT WWW, Telnet, FTP, SNMP, DNS, ICMP, SSH Use this screen to reboot the ADSL Router without turning the power off. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for specific network service. Diagnostic Ping Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. DSL Line Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. 26 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Tutorials 3.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the ADSL Routers various features. Setting Up Your DSL Connection, see page 27 IPv6 Address Configuration, see page 30 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 30 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access, see page 37 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 38 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 38 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service, see page 40 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 43 Port Binding Configuration, see page 45 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic, see page 49 Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using DDNS, see page 53 3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator. If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ADSL Router. Do the following steps:
1 2 3 4 Connect the ADSL Router properly. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the ADSL Routers hardware connection. Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your ADSL Router. The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router/modem provided by your ISP. Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the ADSL Router and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the web configurator. Connect the ADSL Router to a power source, turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Tutorials Account Configuration For this example, the interface type is ADSL and the connection has the following information. General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Router PPPoE 1234@DSL-Ex.com ABCDEF!
Service Name My DSL Multiplex IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack PPP Authentication VPI VCI Others LLC Enabled Auto 0 33 IP Address: Obtain IP Address Automatically DNS Server: Obtained From ISP IPv6 Address: Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically DHCP IPv6: DHCP DHCP PD: Enable WAN Identifier Type: EUI64 28 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Go to Network Setting > Broadband, enter or select these values and click Apply. Chapter 3 Tutorials This completes your DSL WAN connection setting. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.3 IPv6 Address Configuration If the ISPs network supports IPv6, the ISP may assign an IPv6 address to the ADSL Router automatically. IPv6 IPv6 IPv6 In the Network Setting > Broadband screens IPv6 Address configuration section, select Obtain an IP Address Automatically. In the DHCP IPv6 field select DHCP to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. In the DHCP PD field select Enable to have the ADSL Router pass the WAN prefix to LAN hosts. The LAN hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. 3.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the ADSL Router serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the ADSL Router. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 3.4.2 on page 32) or manual configuration (Section 3.4.3 on page 35). 30 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 3.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. In the client, choose the AP with the SSID configured here. When prompted for a key, use the Pre-Shared Key configured here. Chapter 3 Tutorials SSID SecureWirelessNetwork Security Mode WPA2-PSK Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11 Mode 802.11b+g+n 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 31). Click Apply. EXAMPLE 2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Advanced and make sure 802.11b+g+n is selected in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 Tutorials Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the ADSL Router (see Section 3.4.2 on page 32). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the ADSL Router (see Section 3.4.3 on page 35). 3.4.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. WPS is a way to automatically set up a secure wireless network connection between an AP and a notebook. Limitations of using WPS are that is must be done two devices at a time and within two minutes. It uses the ADSL Router as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the ADSL Router. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the ADSL Router. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your ADSL Router is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 Make sure wireless LAN is enabled and the wireless security mode is set to WPA-PSK2 or No Security in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen. 4 5 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button on the ADSL Router for 1-2 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into ADSL Routers web configurator, enable WPS and click the WPS button in the Network Setting >
Wireless > WPS screen. 32 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Note: It doesnt matter which button (on the client or the ADSL Router) is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The ADSL Router sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ADSL Router securely. The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both ADSL Router and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client The Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the ADSL Routers web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 2 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Enter the PIN number in the PIN section in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen on the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 33 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Click the Start and Register buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the ADSL Routers WPS screen within two minutes. The ADSL Router authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ADSL Router securely. The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a ADSL Router and a wireless client by using PIN method. 34 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client The Device Chapter 3 Tutorials WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 3.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your ADSL Router This section describes how to connect wirelessly to your ADSL Router. The connection procedure is shown here using Windows XP as an example. 1 Right-click the wireless adapter icon which appears in the bottom right of your computer monitor. Click View Available Wireless Networks. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 35 Chapter 3 Tutorials Tutorial: Status 2 Select the ADSL Routers SSID name and click Connect (A). The SSID SecureWirelessNetwork is given here as an example. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Tutorial: Status You are prompted to enter a password. Enter it and click Connect. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Tutorial: Status A You may have to wait several minutes while your computer connects to the wireless network. You should now be securely connected wirelessly to the ADSL Router. Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Tutorial: Status P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 3 4 5 36 Chapter 3 Tutorials Congratulations! Your computer is now ready to connect to the Internet wirelessly through your ADSL Router. Note: If you cannot connect wirelessly to the ADSL Router, check you have selected the correct SSID and entered the correct security key. If that does not work, ensure your wireless network adapter is enabled by clicking on the wireless adapter icon and clicking Enable. 3.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the ADSL Router. Thomas can deny access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephines computer. Thomas Josephine 1 Check the MAC address (physical address) of the wireless card on Josephines computer using the ipconfig /all command in a Command Prompt. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 37 Chapter 3 Tutorials C:\>ipconfig /all Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection:
Media State . : Media connected Description . : Wireless USB Adapter Physical Address. : 00-1E-52-C3-5C-1B
---------------------------SNAP!--------------------------------
2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. Select the wireless network in the SSID field and then Deny in the MAC Restrict Mode field. EXAMPLE 3 Enter the MAC address that you want to deny. Click OK. Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet wirelessly through the ADSL Router. 3.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server Thomas manages a Doom server on a computer behind the ADSL Router. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) coming through the default WAN connection (PVC0) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas can use port forwarding. 38 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup D=192.168.1.34 LAN port 666 3.6.1 Port Forwarding Chapter 3 Tutorials WAN A Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the ADSL Router. Traffic should be forwarded to port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer
(see Section 10.3 on page 141 for more information). Activate NAT in the Network Setting > NAT > General screen. Click Apply. Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding. Select PVC0 as the WAN interface and click Add new rule. 1 2 3 Configure the screen with the following values:
Service Name Select User Define. Start/End Ports Enter 666 as the Start and End port. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server (192.168.1.34 for this example). The screen should look as follows. Click Apply. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 39 Chapter 3 Tutorials EXAMPLE 4 The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The ADSL Router forwards port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. EXAMPLE Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas Doom server. 3.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service By default the firewall will block traffic originating from the WAN (1). However, if you are running a server or other service, you may need to allow access from the WAN (2). The following tutorial will show how to allow traffic from WAN to LAN if it matches a specified port number. Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup A LAN WAN 2 1 40 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 1 Click Security > Firewall and select Custom. Click Apply to save your settings. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 3 Click the Rules tab. In the Packet Direction field select WAN to LAN and click Add. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup The Add New Firewall Rule screen will appear. Click the Edit Customized Services button to access the following screen. Click Add and configure the following settings. In this tutorial, a hypothetical port 123 is allowed. Click OK. Service Name Service Type Port Number Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup My_Service TCP 123 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 41 Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 In the Add New Firewall Rule screen, select Active. In the Available Services field, select the service you configured, My_Service. Click OK. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 5 The firewall rule you configured appears in the table. The ADSL Router allows traffic from the WAN to LAN if it matches port 123. 42 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the ADSL Routers LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the ADSL Routers LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ADSL Routers WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B You need to specify a static routing rule on the ADSL Router to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ADSL Router routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. N1 A R N2 B P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 43 Chapter 3 Tutorials This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 2 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The ADSL Routers WAN IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 The ADSL Routers LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
Log into the ADSL Routers Web Configurator. Click Network Setting > Static Route. Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen. Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a 4b 4c Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Enter 1 in the Metric field. 1 2 3 4 4d Click OK. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 44 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3.9 Port Binding Configuration This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS settings for different types of traffic. The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection with specific LAN ports and WLANs. In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for a WAN PVC for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) traffic. ATM QoS settings are also configured for another WAN PVC for non-time sensitive data traffic. 3.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings. More than one WAN connection on the ADSL Router may be configured to record traffic statistics or calculate service charges. Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line:
The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/33, is dedicated for general data transmission. The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/34, is dedicated for VoIP service. The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/35, is dedicated for Media-On-Demand (MOD) service. To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections, access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup screen by clicking Network Setting > Broadband. Click Advanced Setup. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 45 Chapter 3 Tutorials EXAMPLE To configure bandwidth for the data connection, select UBR with PCR in the ATM QoS Type field. Click Apply. 46 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400 kbps for the VoIP connection, select CBR in the ATM QoS Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click Apply to save the settings. To configure variable bandwidth of 2 Mbps for MOD data connection, select Realtime VBR in the ATM QoS Type field. Set the Peak Cell Rate as 4717 (divide the bandwidth 2mbps by 424) and set both the Sustain Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 4716 (which is less than the peak cell rate). Click Apply to save the settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 47 Chapter 3 Tutorials Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network Setting > Broadband. See the WAN Setup chapter (Chapter 5 on page 63) for more information on configuring WAN connections and ATM QoS settings. 3.9.2 Configuring Port Binding You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs, so traffic from these ports is forwarded through specific WAN PVCs. In the configuration shown below, the WAN connections set up in the previous section are bound as follows:
Table 3 Port Binding Groups GROUP INDEX WAN CONNECTION 0 PVC0 - for Data 1 2 PVC1 - for VoIP PVC2 - for MOD LAN PORT eth1, eth2, AP0 eth3 eth4 Access the port binding screen by clicking Network Setting > Port Binding, and select Activated Port Binding to turn on the port binding feature. Click the Port Binding tab, specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the port binding group. Click Apply. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 1 2 48 Chapter 3 Tutorials EXAMPLE 3 The configured groups can be viewed by clicking the Port Binding Summary button. See the Port Binding chapter (Chapter 11 on page 149) for more details on configuring port binding. 3.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority. You can do the following:
Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic from the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 1. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 49 Chapter 3 Tutorials Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ADSL Router. DSL Your computer MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF E-mail: Queue 1 A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Setting > QoS and check Active QoS. Click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 2 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup. Click the Edit icon next to an entry to configure a queue. 3 Select Active and give it a name (Queue1 in this example). Select WAN in the Interface field and 1 in the Priority and Weight fields. Then click OK. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 50 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 4 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup and click Add new Classifier. Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Select Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Then click OK. Note that you have to select TCP in the IP Protocol field first, then you can configure the source port range setting. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 51 Chapter 3 Tutorials Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup Interface To Queue Select From LAN. Link this to a queue created in the Network Setting > QoS
> Queue Setup screen, which is the 1 queue created in this example. 52 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Source MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer -
AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the Source Mac Netmask if you know it. Source Port Range Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied -
25 for SMTP. Protocol ID Select the IP protocol type - TCP. This maps e-mail traffic to queue 1 created in the previous screen (see the Source Port Range field). This also maps your computers MAC address to queue 1 (see the Source MAC Address field). 3.11 Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using DDNS If you connect your ADSL Router to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The ADSL Routers WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ADSL Router using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial shows you how to:
Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 3 4 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 53 Chapter 3 Tutorials Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ADSL Router is currently using. You can find the IP address on the ADSL Routers web configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ADSL Router later. 3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > Dynamic DNS screen. Select Active Dynamic DNS. Select www.dyndns.org in the Service Provider field. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the ADSL Router from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 54 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The ADSL Routers login page should appear. You can then log into the ADSL Router and manage it. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 55 56 CHAPTER 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens 4.1 Overview After you log into the web configurator, the Connection Status screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the ADSL Router and clients connected to it. Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device, system resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN, WLAN). 4.2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 7 Connection Status: Icon View P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens Figure 8 Connection Status: List View In Icon View, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and then click on Info.. In List View, you can also view the clients information. 4.3 The System Info Screen Click Connection Status > System Info to open this screen. Figure 9 System Info Screen 58 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens Each field is described in the following table. Table 4 System Info Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Device Information DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down list box. Host Name This field displays the ADSL Router system name. It is used for identification. Model Name This is the model name of your device. MAC Address This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your ADSL Router. Firmware Version This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Go to the Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade screen to change it. DSL Version This is the current version of the ADSL Routers DSL modem code. WAN Information DSL Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. Annex Type This is the ADSL Annex Type that your ADSL Router is using. IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ADSL Router in the WAN. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. Default Gateway Primary/
Secondary DNS IPv6 Global IP IPv6 Prefix Length This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the primary/secondary DNS server IP address assigned to the ADSL Router. This is the current IPv6 address of the ADSL Router in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the WAN. IPv6 Gateway This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway, if applicable. IPv6 WAN DNS1/2 Link-Local Address IPv4/IPv6 MTU VPI/VCI LAN Information This is the primary/secondary DNS server IPv6 address assigned to the ADSL Router. This is the link local address assigned to the ADSL Router within the LAN. This is the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) for IPv4 and IPv6 packets passing through the WAN interface. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection screen. IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ADSL Router in the LAN. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. IPv6 Address IPv6 Prefix Length IPv6 Prefix This is the current IPv6 address of the ADSL Router in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the LAN. This is the current IPv6 prefix in the LAN. IPv6 Global IP This is the current global IPv6 address of the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL DHCP DESCRIPTION This field displays what DHCP services the ADSL Router is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The ADSL Router is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The ADSL Router acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The ADSL Router is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. IPv6 LAN DNS1/
2 This is the first/second DNS server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP clients. WLAN Information Status SSID Channel This displays whether wireless LAN is turned on or off. This is the descriptive name used to identify the ADSL Router in the wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the ADSL Router now. Security Mode This displays the type of security the ADSL Router is using in the wireless LAN. WPS Configured displays when the WPS security settings have been configured and wireless clients can connect with the device through WPS. Unconfigured displays when the device has not been configured and wireless clients cant establish a link with the device through WPS. Scheduling This displays whether WLAN scheduling is activated. WiFi MAC This is the MAC (Media Access Control) of the WiFi interface. Security Firewall Interface Status Interface Status This displays whether or not the ADSL Routers firewall is activated. Click this to go tothe screen where you can change it. This column displays each interface the ADSL Router has. This field indicates whether or not the ADSL Router is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Initializing (line is initializing), Establishing Link (line is establishing a link) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the ADSL Router is connected through an Ethernet cable to a computer or a HUB. It displays Down when the ADSL Routers Ethernet port is disconnected. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. Rate For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed. For the WAN interface, this displays the DSL link rate downstream and upstream. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. System Status DSL UpTime This field displays how long the DSL connection has been active System UpTime This field displays how long the ADSL Router has been running since it last started up. The ADSL Router starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance >
Reboot), or when you reset it (see Chapter 1 on page 18). 60 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens LABEL Current Date/
Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage DESCRIPTION This field displays the current date and time in the ADSL Router. You can change this in Maintenance > Time Setting. This field displays what percentage of the ADSL Routers processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ADSL Router is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications. This field displays what percentage of the ADSL Routers memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100% and remains like that for a high period of time, the ADSL Router may become unstable and you should restart it. See Chapter 23 on page 209, or turn off the device
(unplug the power) for a few seconds. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens 62 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 5 Broadband 5.1 Overview This chapter describes the ADSL Routers Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your ADSL Router for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 10 LAN and WAN LAN WAN 5.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens Use the Internet Connection screen (Section 5.2 on page 64) to configure the WAN settings on the ADSL Router for Internet access. Use the More Connections screen (Section 5.3 on page 69) to set up additional Internet access connections. 5.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ADSL Router, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ADSL Router to communicate with other devices in other P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 63 Chapter 5 Broadband networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ADSL Router tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one. IGMP IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IPv6 IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to increase IP address space and enhance features. The ADSL Router supports IPv4/IPv6 dual stack and can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks. See
(Appendix E on page 283) for more information about IPv6. Finding Out More See Section 5.4 on page 73 for technical background information on WAN. 5.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 5.2 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your ADSL Routers WAN settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband
> Internet Connection. The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select. 64 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection LABEL Line DESCRIPTION ADSL Mode Select the mode supported by your ISP. Use Auto Sync-Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from. The ADSL Router dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best compatible one for your connection. Other options are ADSL2+, ADSL2, G.DMT, T1.413 and G.lite. General P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued) LABEL Mode DESCRIPTION Select Router (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP gives you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ADSL Router. Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available.
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above. User Name Password Service Name
(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here. Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack If you select Enable, the ADSL Router can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select Disable, the ADSL Router will operate in IPv4 mode. PPP Authentication The ADSL Router supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP
(Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP;
however, PAP is readily available on more platforms. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
AUTO - Your ADSL Router accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP - Your ADSL Router accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your ADSL Router accepts PAP only. Virtual Circuit ID VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. IP Address This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;
otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field and a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) below. DNS Server - This section is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field. Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the ADSL Router get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Use the following Static DNS IP Address Select this to have the ADSL Router use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. 66 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the ADSL Router use the IPv6 prefix from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. DHCP IPv6 Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the ADSL Router using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. Select SLAAC (Stateless address autoconfiguration) to have the ADSL Router use the prefix to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Selelct Auto to have the ADSL Router ??
Select Enable to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) to allow the ADSL Router to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. Select Manual to manually enter a WAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the WAN interface. The WAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate an interface ID from the MAC address of the WAN interface. If you selected Manual, enter the WAN Identifier in this field. The WAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character. Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX:XXXX::XXXX. DHCP PD WAN Identifier Type WAN Identifier Connection (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Keep Alive Apply Cancel Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time. The ADSL Router will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Advanced Setup Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup. Click this button again to display less fields in this screen. 5.2.1 Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your ADSL Router's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Connection screen. The screen appears as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 67 Chapter 5 Broadband Figure 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP Direction DESCRIPTION RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the ADSL Router sends and receives on the subnet. RIP Version This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M. Multicast Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets sent to every computer). MLD Proxy ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2 and IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it. Select the version of MLD proxy (v1 or v2) to have the ADSL Router act as for this connection. This allows the ADSL Router to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select None to turn off MLD proxy. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR With PCR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. 68 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. Chapter 5 Broadband If encapsulation type is PPPoE, select this to enable PPPoE Passthrough. In addition to the Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can select this to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535. Maximum Burst Size PPPoE Passthrough MTU MTU 5.3 The More Connections Screen The ADSL Router allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure additional Internet access connections click Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections. The screen differs by the encapsulation you select. When you use the Broadband >
Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access, you are configuring the first WAN connection. Figure 13 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection. Active This field indicates whether the connection is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it. Node Name This is the name you gave to the Internet connection. VPI/VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 69 Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections (continued) LABEL Encapsulation DESCRIPTION This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection. Modify The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the Broadband > Internet Connection screen to edit it. Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup. Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list. 5.3.1 More Connections Edit Use this screen to configure a connection. Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to display the following screen. Figure 14 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit LABEL General DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection. Node Name Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection. 70 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit (continued) LABEL Mode DESCRIPTION Select Router from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. If you select Bridge, the ADSL Router will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded. Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available. Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol. For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols. IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack If you select Enable, the ADSL Router can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select Disable, the ADSL Router will operate in IPv4 mode. VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. IP Address This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select Obtain an IP Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field. Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Gateway IP Address Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP). Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS servers address for the ADSL Router. Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS servers address for the ADSL Router. NAT SUA Only is available only when you select Router in the Mode field. Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Otherwise, select None to disable NAT. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Advanced Setup Click this to display more fields in this screen to configure more details of your WAN settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 71 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your ADSL Router's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup arrow icon in the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 15 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup DESCRIPTION RIP Direction Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. RIP Version This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Multicast ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select the RIP Version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2 and IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select nrtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-non Real Time) or rtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-
Real Time) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications. Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. MTU 72 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL MTU DESCRIPTION The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. Chapter 5 Broadband For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. For PPPoA and RFC, the MTU is 100-1500. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 5.4 WAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 5.4.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ADSL Router supports the following methods. 5.4.1.1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get this information from your ISP. 5.4.1.2 PPP over Ethernet The ADSL Router supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem
(DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the ADSL Router (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ADSL Router does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 73 Chapter 5 Broadband 5.4.1.3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ADSL Router encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 5.4.1.4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. 5.4.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 5.4.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 5.4.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway. 74 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable
(N/A). If you have a Static IP Address assigned by your ISP, then they should also assign you a Subnet Mask and a Gateway IP Address. Chapter 5 Broadband IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP address assignment must be static. IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the ADSL Router acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the ADSL Router. 5.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The ADSL Router does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the ADSL Router will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons. Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern. 5.4.6 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 5.5 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 75 Chapter 5 Broadband Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 16 Example of Traffic Shaping 5.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. 76 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. Chapter 5 Broadband P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 77 Chapter 5 Broadband 78 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 6 Wireless LAN 6.1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network, including the following. Turning the wireless connection on or off. Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network. Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network. Setting up multiple wireless networks. Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network. Performing other performance-related wireless tasks. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens This section describes the ADSL Routers Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ADSL Routers wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 6.2 on page 80). Use the More AP screen (see Section 6.3 on page 86) to set up multiple wireless networks on your ADSL Router. Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the ADSL Router (Section 6.4 on page 88). Use the WPS screen (see Section 6.5 on page 89) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the ADSL Routers WPS status. Use the WDS screen (see Section 6.6 on page 90) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the ADSL Router acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points. Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.7 on page 92). Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 6.8 on page 92) to configure the dates/times to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Use the Advanced screen to configure wireless advanced features (Section 6.9 on page 93). You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and security in the General screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 6.10 on page 95 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 6.1.3 Before You Start Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 6.1.2 on page 80 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you. What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network?
Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them as they are. 6.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the ADSL Router from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ADSL Routers SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ADSL Routers new settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. 80 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General Chapter 6 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 10 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name
(SSID) The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Client Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the ADSL Router. MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ADSL Router. Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ADSL Router. Set the operating channel manually by selecting a channel from the Channel Selection list or use Auto to have it automatically determine a channel to use. This field displays the channel the ADSL Router is currently using. Channel Selection Operating Channel P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Table 10 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ADSL Router. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. See the following sections for more details about this field. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 6.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ADSL Router, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 18 Wireless > General: No Security 6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your ADSL Router allows you to configure one 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key. 82 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. Figure 19 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) Chapter 6 Wireless LAN The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 11 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. Generate password automatically Password Select this option to have the ADSL Router automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP key) are used to encrypt data. Both the ADSL Router and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F"). WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. 6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ADSL Router and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 12 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. more.../hide more Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. WPA-PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Select Enable to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your ADSL Router. The ADSL Router supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. Otherwise, select Disable. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Encryption This field displays the encryption type for data encryption. If you choose WPA-PSK as the security mode, the ADSL Router uses TKIP for data encryption. If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL Router uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption. If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL Router uses AES for data encryption. 6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. 84 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 21 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2) data encryption. Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ADSL Router. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ADSL Router. The key is not sent over the network. more.../hide more Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. ReAuthentication Timer Network Re-auth Interval Enter how often the external authentication server requires a connected wireless client to reauthenticate itself to the server again. Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. This field is available only when you select WPA2 as security mode. If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued) LABEL WPA Compatible DESCRIPTION This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ADSL Router to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. Group Key Update Timer The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Encryption Select the encryption type for data encryption. If you choose WPA as the security mode, the ADSL Router uses TKIP for data encryption. If you choose WPA2 as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL Router uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption. If you choose WPA2 as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL Router uses AES for data encryption. 6.3 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ADSL Router. Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays. Figure 22 Network Seting > Wireless > More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile. Active SSID This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ADSL Routers BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. 6.3.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. 86 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 23 More AP: Edit Chapter 6 Wireless LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 15 More AP: Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup DESCRIPTION Wireless Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name
(SSID) Hide SSID Client Isolation The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the ADSL Router. MBSSID/LAN Isolation Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ADSL Router. Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ADSL Router. Security Level Security Mode Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ADSL Router. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 87 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 6.4 The MAC Authentication Screen This screen allows you to configure the ADSL Router to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ADSL Router (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. Use this screen to view your ADSL Routers MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 24 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. MAC List Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Allow to permit access to the ADSL Router. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ADSL Router. Select Deny to block access to the ADSL Router. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ADSL Router. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ADSL Router in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Add new MAC address
#
This is the index number of the entry. MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ADSL Router. Modify Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 88 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 6.5 The WPS Screen Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ADSL Router. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 6.10.8.3 on page 103 for more information about WPS. Note: The ADSL Router applies the security settings configured in the General screen (see Section 6.2 on page 80). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode to WPA2-PSK or No Security. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL General DESCRIPTION WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on the ADSL Router. Otherwise, select Disable to deactivate WPS. Add a new device with WPS Method P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 89 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL Method 1 PBC DESCRIPTION Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration
(PBC). WPS Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ADSL Router) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 PIN Register Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the ADSL Router. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ADSL Router. WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN Status Release Configuration The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ADSL Router is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN button to have the ADSL Router create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the ADSL Router has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the ADSL Router or you click Release to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. The default WPS status is Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ADSL Router. 802.11 Mode This field displays the ADSL Routers wireless mode that only allows the compliant WLAN devices to associate with it. SSID Security This field displays the SSID the ADSL Router is currently using. This field displays the security mode the ADSL Router is currently using. Pre-Shared Key This field displays the pre-shared key the ADSL Router uses when the security mode is set to WPA(2)-PSK. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 6.6 The WDS Screen An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to configure the ADSL Router to connect to other APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. 90 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ADSL Router and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the ADSL Router and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other APs documentation. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS LABEL WDS Security DESCRIPTION Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs
(including the ADSL Router) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission. TKIP AES
#
Active The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA(2) or WPA(2)-
PSK in the Wireless > General screen. Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption. Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption. This is the index number of the individual WDS link. Select this to activate the link between the ADSL Router and the peer device to which this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down. Remote Bridge MAC Address Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). PSK Apply Cancel Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 91 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 6.7 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 27 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL Enable WMM of SSID1~4 DESCRIPTION Use these checkbox to determine whether to have the ADSL Router automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends for a wireless network. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 6.8 The Scheduling Screen Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling. The following screen displays. 92 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling Chapter 6 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling LABEL Wireless LAN Scheduling DESCRIPTION Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate wireless LAN scheduling on your ADSL Router. State Day Time (24-Hour Format) Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Check the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off. Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply. For example, if you set the time range from 12:00 to 23:00, the wireless LAN will be turned on only during this time period. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 6.9 The Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >
Advanced, the screen appears as shown. See Section 6.10.2 on page 96 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 93 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Figure 29 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced LABEL Fragmentation Threshold DESCRIPTION This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Output Power Preamble 802.11 Mode Set the output power of the ADSL Router. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%. Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. See the Appendix D on page 273 for more information. Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. Select 802.11b+g to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL Router might be reduced. Select 802.11n to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. Select 802.11g+n to allow either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL Router might be reduced. Select 802.11b+g+n to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL Router might be reduced. Channel Width Select whether the ADSL Router uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto. If Auto is selected, the ADSL Router will use 40MHz if it is supported. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n or 802.11b+g+n in the Advanced Setup screen. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 94 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 6.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 30 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your ADSL Router is the AP. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 95 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ADSL Routers Web Configurator. Table 22 Additional Wireless Terms TERM Preamble DESCRIPTION A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ADSL Router does, it cannot communicate with the ADSL Router. Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. Fragmentation Threshold A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. 6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only 96 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 6.10.3.1 SSID Normally, the ADSL Router acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ADSL Router does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 6.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ADSL Router which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 97 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 6.10.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 6.10.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 6.10.3.3 on page 98 for information about this.) Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security RADIUS SERVER WPA Static WEP WPA-PSK Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ADSL Router and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA-PSK. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ADSL Router, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ADSL Router. 98 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 6.10.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 6.10.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 31 Basic Service set P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 99 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 6.10.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ADSL Routers MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 6.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 6.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The ADSL Router can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Figure 32 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 6.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your ADSL Router supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device 100 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 6 Wireless LAN to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 6.10.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the ADSL Router, see Section 6.6 on page 90). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the ADSL Router you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 6.10.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 2 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 101 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 3 4 5 6 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ADSL Router, see Section 6.5 on page 89). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. 102 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 33 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR Chapter 6 Wireless LAN WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:
WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 6.10.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 103 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Figure 34 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 6.10.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. 104 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 35 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO Chapter 6 Wireless LAN REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 36 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 105 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN Figure 37 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 6.10.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA2-PSK). When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the 106 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. Chapter 6 Wireless LAN P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 107 Chapter 6 Wireless LAN 108 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Home Networking 7.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your ADSL Router (Section 7.2 on page 111). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 7.3 on page 113). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the ADSL Router (Section 7.4 on page 114). Use the IP Alias screen (Section 7.5 on page 114) to change your ADSL Routers IP alias settings. Use the IPv6 LAN Setup screen (Section 7.6 on page 115) to configure the IPv6 settings on your ADSL Routers LAN interface. 7.1.2 What You Need To Know 7.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Home Networking Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your ADSL Router an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. 7.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 11 on page 155 for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ADSL Router allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. 110 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. Finding Out More See Section 7.7 on page 119 for technical background information on LANs. 7.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 7.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address, subnet mask and advanced networking settings such as RIP, multicast of your ADSL Router. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Figure 38 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 24 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL LAN IP Setup DESCRIPTION IP Address Subnet Mask Dynamic Route Direction Multicast Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ADSL Router in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ADSL Router automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Select the RIP version from RIP1 and RIP2. Use this field to control how much routing information the VDSL Router sends and receives on the subnet. Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, IN Only and OUT Only. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP v1/IGMP v2/
IGMP v3. Select None to disable it. IGMP Snooping Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping. This allows the ADSL Router to passively learn memberships in multicast groups. Otherwise, select Disabled to deactivate it. DHCP Server State DHCP If set to Enable, your ADSL Router can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client. If set to Disable, the DHCP server will be disabled. If set to DHCP Relay, the ADSL Router acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case. When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:
IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Pool Size This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. DHCP Server Lease Time Lease Time DNS Values DNS This field specifies the lease time in seconds of an IP address assigned by the DHCP server. Select Dynamic to have the ADSL Router pass a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP clients. Select Static and enter the DNS server IP address(es) in the fields below, if you know the IP address. DNS Server 1/2 Enter the IP address of your primary/secondary DNS server. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Advanced Setup Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup. 112 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your ADSL Routers static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting >
Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 39 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry. DESCRIPTION
#
Active MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the ADSL Router. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. IP Address Modify This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 40 Static DHCP: Add/Edit P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Static DHCP: Add/Edit LABEL MAC Address DESCRIPTION If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. IP Address OK Cancel If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 110 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your ADSL Router. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 41 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 27 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ADSL Router's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Otherwise, select Disable to deactivate UPnP. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.5 The IP Alias Screen IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The ADSL Router supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the ADSL Router itself as the gateway for the LAN network. 114 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). 7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen Use this screen to change your ADSL Routers IP alias settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias to open the following screen. Figure 42 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias LABEL IP Alias DESCRIPTION Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the ADSL Router. IP Address Enter the IP address of your ADSL Router in dotted decimal notation. IP Subnet Mask Your ADSL Router will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ADSL Router. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 7.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your ADSL Routers LAN interface. See Appendix E on page 283 for background information about IPv6. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 115 Chapter 7 Home Networking Figure 43 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. 116 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup LABEL IPv6 LAN Setup DESCRIPTION Link Local Address Type Select Manual to manually enter a link local address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate a link local address from the Ethernet MAC address. IPv6 Address Prefix MLD Snooping Lan Global Identifier Type Lan Identifier If you selected Manual in the Link Local Address Type field, enter the LAN IPv6 address you want to assign to your ADSL Router in hexadecimal notation, for example, fe80::1 (factory default). Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enabled to activate MLD Snooping on the ADSL Router. This allows the ADSL Router to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. Select Manual to manually enter a LAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the LAN interface. The LAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate an interface ID from the Ethernet MAC address. If you selected Manual, enter the LAN Identifier in this field. The LAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character. Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX:XXXX::XXXX. LAN IPv6 Address Setting Delegate prefix from WAN Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the ADSL Routers LAN IPv6 address. Static IPv6 Address Prefix If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the ADSL Router uses for the LAN IPv6 address. Prefix length If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the ADSL Router uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. Preferred Lifetime Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix. Valid Lifetime RADVD Setup Send RA on Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix. Select this to have the ADSL Router send router advertisement messages to the LAN hosts. Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information. Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature. Delegate M/O flag from WAN Select this to have the ADSL Router obtain the M/O (Managed/Other) flag setting from the service provider or uplink router. Manual Select this to specify the M/O flag setting manually. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 117 Chapter 7 Home Networking LABEL Managed config flag on DESCRIPTION Select this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message. Other config flag on Select this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6. Advertisement interval option on Hop limit Router Lifetime Router Preference Clear this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network. Select this to have the Router Advertisement messages the VDSL Router sends specify the allowed interval between Router Advertisement messages. Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0. Possible value for this field are 0-255. Enter the time in seconds that hosts should consider the ADSL Router to be the default router. Possible values for this field are 0-9000. Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the ADSL Router. The ADSL Router sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the ADSL Router. This helps hosts to choose their default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network. Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work. Reachable Time (ms) Enter the time in milliseconds that can elapse before a neighbor is detected. Possible values for this field are 0-3600000. Retrans Timer (ms) Enter the time in milliseconds between neighbor solicitation packet retransmissions. Possible values for this field are 1000-4294967295. RA Interval Enter the time in seconds between router advertisement messages. Possible values for this field are 4-1800. Delegate MTU from WAN Select this to have the ADSL Router obtain the MTU setting from the service provider or uplink router. Manual MTU DAD attempts DHCPv6 Select this to specify the MTU manually. The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the ADSL Router divides it into smaller fragments. Specify the number of DAD (Duplicate Address Detection) attempts before an IPv6 address is assigned to the ADSL Router LAN interface. Possible values for this field are 1-7. DHCPv6 Server Use this field to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 server on the ADSL Router. DNSv6 Mode Primary DNS Secondary DNS Select the DNS role (Proxy or Relay) that you want the ADSL Router to act in the IPv6 LAN network. Alternatively, select Manual and specify the DNS servers IPv6 address in the fields below. This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the first DNS server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP clients. This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the second DNS server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP clients. Information refresh time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 118 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7.7 Home Networking Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the ADSL Router The actual physical connection determines whether the ADSL Router ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 44 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 7.7.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ADSL Router as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ADSL Router provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The ADSL Router is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 119 Chapter 7 Home Networking Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ADSL Router supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP The ADSL Router has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ADSL Router. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ADSL Router, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ADSL Router will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ADSL Router unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 120 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 7.7.5 RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:
Both - the ADSL Router will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives. In Only - the ADSL Router will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received. Out Only - the ADSL Router will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received. None - the ADSL Router will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ADSL Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on non-router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. 7.7.6 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3 supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 121 Chapter 7 Home Networking
(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the ADSL Router queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the ADSL Router periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/
disabled on the ADSL Router LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. 122 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Static Route 8.1 Overview The ADSL Router usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ADSL Router send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ADSL Routers LAN interface. The ADSL Router routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ADSL Routers default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 45 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 123 Chapter 8 Static Route 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens Use the Static Route screens (Section 8.2 on page 124) to view and configure IP static routes on the ADSL Router. Use the IPv6 Static Route screens (Section 8.3 on page 125) to view and configure IPv6 static routes on the ADSL Router. 8.2 The Static Route Screen Use this screen to view the static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. Figure 46 Network Setting > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 Network Setting > Static Route LABEL Add new static route DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route.
#
This is the number of an individual static route. Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. Metric Modify This is the number of transmission hops between this ADSL Router and the destination. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ADSL Router. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ADSL Router. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 8.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. 124 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 47 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit Chapter 8 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit LABEL Destination IP Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here. Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Metric OK Cancel Enter the number of transmission hops (routers) that need to accross from the ADSL Router to the destination. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 8.3 IPv6 Static Route Use this screen to view the IPv6 static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route to open the IPv6 Static Route screen. Figure 48 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route LABEL Add new static route DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new IPv6 static route.
#
Destination This is the number of an individual static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Static Route Table 32 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route LABEL Prefix Length DESCRIPTION An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. Device Modify This specifies the LAN or WAN PVC. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ADSL Router. Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the ADSL Router. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 8.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit Use this screen to configure the required information for an IPv6 static route. Click Add new static route or select an IPv6 static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 49 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit LABEL Destination IPv6 Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a prefix length of 128 in the prefix length field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IPv6 Prefix Length Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits compose the network address. PVC IPv6 Address Select the interface through which the traffic is routed. OK Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 126 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.1 Overview Use the QoS screen to set up your ADSL Router to use QoS for traffic management. Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control bandwidth. QoS allows the ADSL Router to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Without QoS, all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical applications such as video-on-demand. The ADSL Router assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the bosss IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ADSL Router. Figure 50 QoS Example VoIP: Queue 6 Boss: Queue 5 IP=192.168.1.23 DSL 50 Mbps 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens Use the General screen (Section 9.2 on page 128) to enable QoS on the ADSL Router, and specify the type of scheduling. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 127 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Use the Queue screen (Section 9.3 on page 129) to configure QoS settings on the ADSL Router. Use the Class Setup screen (Section 9.4 on page 131) to configure QoS settings on the ADSL Router. Use the Game List screen (Section 9.5 on page 135) to to give priority to traffic for specific games. 9.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS 802.1p QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. 802.1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use 802.1p to give different priorities to different packet types. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value and IEEE 802.1p priority level in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Finding Out More See Section 9.6 on page 136 for advanced technical information on QoS. 9.2 The Quality of Service General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Figure 51 Network Setting > QoS > General 128 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL Active QoS DESCRIPTION Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by Select how the ADSL Router assigns priorities to various incoming and outgoing traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the ADSL Router put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 9.3 The Queue Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment disciplines and priorities. Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue to open the screen as shown next. Figure 52 Network Setting > QoS > Queue The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > QoS > Queue LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 129 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 35 Network Setting > QoS > Queue LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION This shows the name of the ADSL Routers interface through which traffic in this queue passes. Priority Weight This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 9.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 53 Queue Setup: Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Queue Setup: Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Name Interface Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the ADSL Router divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 130 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 9.4 The Class Setup Screen Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the ADSL Router forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the screen as shown next. Figure 54 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier. DESCRIPTION Index Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. From Interface This shows the interface from which traffic of this class should come. Classification Criteria This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the type and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. 802.1P/1Q Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level and 802.1Q VLAN tag assigned to traffic of this classifier. To Queue Modify This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 9.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit Click Add new Classifier in the Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup screen or click the Edit icon next to a class, the screen appears as shown next. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 131 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 55 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit 132 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit LABEL Rule Index DESCRIPTION Select the rules index number from the drop-down list box. Class Configuration Active Use this field to enable or disable the QoS class rule. Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IPv4 or IPv6, you also need to configure source or destination IP address, MAC address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select ARP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID. Select an interface if you want to classify the traffic received by it. Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Interface To Queue Criteria Configuration Basic From Interface If you select From LAN in the Interface field, you can select specific interface(s) from which traffic is received. ra0 ~ ra3 means wireless interfaces WLAN0 to WLAN3. If you select From WAN in the Interface field, you can select a specific WAN connection
(PVC0~PVC2) from which traffic is received. Source IP Address Subnet Netmask/
Source Prefix Length Port Range Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type. Enter the source prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type. If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Mac Netmask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Destination IP Address Subnet Netmask/
Destination Prefix Length Port Range Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank IP address means any destination IP address. Enter the destination subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type. Enter the destination prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type. If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 133 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Mac Netmask Exclude Others IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field. If you select IPv4, select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP/
UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP.If you select IPv6, select this option and select the protocol
(service type) from TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMPv6. TCP ACK This field is available only when you select TCP in the IP protocol field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. Packet Length This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. IPP/DS Field Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. IP Precedence Range Type of Service Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence. 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest. Select a type of service from the drop-down list box. Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. DSCP Range Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. 802.1P Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. VLAN ID Select this option and enter the source VLAN ID in this field. Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Action Forward To Select the interface through which traffic that matches the rule is forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the ADSL Router forwards traffic of this class according to the default routing table. If traffic of this class comes from a WAN interface and is in a queue that forwards traffic through the LAN/WLAN interface, the ADSL Router ignores the setting here. IPP/DS Field Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. IP Precedence Mark Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re-assign IP precedence to matched traffic. 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest. 134 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a type of service to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic. Type Of Service Mark DSCP Mark(0~63) Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ADSL Router replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the ADSL Router keep the DSCP field in the packets. 802.1Q Tag If you select Remark, select a priority level (in the Ethernet Priority field) and enter a VLAN ID number (in the VLAN ID field) with which the ADSL Router replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field and VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the ADSL Router deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the ADSL Router treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second priority level and VLAN ID that you specify in the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID fields. If you select Same, the ADSL Router keep the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID in the packets. To configure the Ethernet Priority, you can either select a priority number in the first drop-down list box (7 is the highest and 0 is the lowest priority) or select an application from the second drop-down list box which automatically maps to the corresponding priority number. (Key Net Traffic: 7; Voice: 6; Video: 5;IGMP: 4; Key Data: 3) OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.5 The QoS Game List Screen Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games. Click Network Setting > QoS > Game List to open the screen as shown next. Figure 56 Network Setting > QoS > Game List P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 135 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network Setting > QoS > Game List LABEL Enable Game List DESCRIPTION Select this to have QoS give the highest priority to traffic for the games you specify. This priority is higher than the other QoS queues. Apply Cancel Select the games below. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore previously saved settings. 9.6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 9.6.1 IEEE 802.1p IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 40 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Level 6 Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic. 9.6.2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. 136 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 9.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the ADSL Router, the ADSL Router can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ADSL Router. On the ADSL Router, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 41 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)
>1100 250~1100
<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 137 Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS) 138 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ADSL Router. NAT (Network Address Translation
- NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the General screen (Section 10.2 on page 140) to activate/deactivate NAT for the default WAN connection (PVC0). Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 10.3 on page 141) to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 10.4 on page 144). 10.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ADSL Router, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 139 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 10.5 on page 144 for advanced technical information on NAT. 10.2 The NAT General Screen Use this screen to activate NAT for the default WAN connection (PVC0). Click Network Setting >
NAT to open the following screen. Note: You must create an IP filter rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ADSL Router. Figure 57 Network Setting > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network Setting > NAT > General LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable NAT. Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet. Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the ADSL Router. If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 140 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 10.3 The Port Forwarding Screen Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 293. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ADSL Router discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 58 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN WAN B=192.168.1.34 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 10.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 141 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) See Appendix F on page 293 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Note: Make sure NAT is activated on the WAN connection before you configure a port forwarding rule for it. For the default WAN connection (PVC0), activate NAT in the Network Setting > NAT > General screen. For other WAN connections
(PVC1~PVC7), activate NAT for an individual WAN connection in the Broadband >
More Connections > Edit screen. Figure 59 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 43 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select a WAN connection for which you want to configure a port forwarding rule. Add new rule Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
#
Active This is the rule index number (read-only). This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. Service Name This is a services name. External Start Port This is the first port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to access the service in your local network. External End Port This is the last port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to access the service in your local network. Internal Start Port This is the starting port number that the device translates for the service in your local network. Internal End Port This is the ending port number that the device translates for the service in your local network. Server IP Address This is the servers IP address in your local network. Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule. Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule. Click the Add new rule button or a rules edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen as shown next. 142 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 60 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Add/Edit Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Click this check box to enable the rule. Service Name Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule. External Start Port Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. External End Port Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server in your local network. Trigger Protocol Select the protocol of the service, TCP, UDP or ALL (TCP+UDP). Open Start Port Open End Port Enter the first port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range. Enter the last port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range. Back Apply Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 143 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 10.4 The DMZ Screen If you need to allow packets from a specific WAN connection to your local network, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from the specified WAN connection and the ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 61 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 45 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select a WAN PVC connection (PVC0~PVC7) from which you want to forward the traffic to the specified default server. Default Server Address Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT > Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the ADSL Router discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.5 NAT Technical Reference This chapter contains more information regarding NAT. 10.5.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ADSL Router, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in 144 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 46 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. Outside This refers to the host on the WAN. Local Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 10.5.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping see Table 47 on page 147), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ADSL Router filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 10.5.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ADSL Router keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 62 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 10.5.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the ADSL Router can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. Figure 63 NAT Application With IP Alias 10.5.5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:
One to One: In One-to-One mode, the ADSL Router maps one local IP address to one global IP address. 146 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the ADSL Router maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in todays routers). Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the ADSL Router maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the ADSL Router maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping types. The following table summarizes these types. Table 47 NAT Mapping Types TYPE One-to-One Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) Many-to-Many Overload IP MAPPING ILA1 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 Many-to-Many No Overload ILA1 IGA1 Server ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA3 Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 147 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 148 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Port Binding 11.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings. Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups. You may bind WAN PVCs to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded. Different ATM QoS settings can be specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be transferred. For example, three port binding groups could be created on the device (R1) for three different WAN PVC connections. The first PVC (PVC0) is for non time-sensitive data traffic. The second and third PVCs (PVC1 and PVC2) are for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) video traffic and VoIP traffic, respectively. Figure 64 Port Binding Groups Data VoIP MOD PVC0 R1 PVC1 PVC2 R1 R1 S1 S2 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 149 Chapter 11 Port Binding If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port, traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa. If a port is not in a port binding group, traffic to and from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table. See the tutorial section (Section 4.10 on page 65) for more details on configuring port binding for multiple WAN connections. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens Use the General screen (Section 11.3 on page 150) to activate port binding. Use the Port Binding screen (Section 11.3 on page 150) to set up port binding groups. Use the Port Binding Summary screen (Section 11.3.1 on page 151) to view configured port binding groups. 11.2 The Port Binding General Screen Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting >
Port Binding to display the following screen. Figure 65 Network Setting > Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network Setting > Port Binding LABEL Activated Port Binding Activate or deactivate the port binding feature. DESCRIPTION Apply Add the selected port binding group configuration. 11.3 The Port Binding Screen Use this screen to set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding to display the following screen. 150 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 66 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Chapter 11 Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding LABEL Port Binding DESCRIPTION Active Activate or deactivate port binding for the port binding group. Group Index Select the index number for the port binding group. When a port is assigned to a port binding group, traffic will be forwarded to the other ports in the group, but not to ports in other groups. If a port is not included in any groups, traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table. Select the ATM VC (PVC) to include in the port binding group. Each ATM VC can only be bound to one group. Select the Ethernet (Eth) ports to include in the port binding group. Each Ethernet port can only be bound to one group. Select the WLAN (AP) connection to include in the port binding group. Additional APs can be enabled on the More AP screen (Section 6.3 on page 86). Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups. Add the selected port binding group configuration. Delete the selected port binding group configuration. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. ATM VCs Ethernet Wireless LAN Group Summary Port Binding Summary Apply Delete Cancel 11.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen Use this screen to view configured port binding groups. In the Port Binding screen, click the Port Binding Summary button in the Group Summary section to display the following screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 151 Chapter 11 Port Binding Figure 67 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary Example The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary LABEL Group ID DESCRIPTION This field displays the group index number. Group port This field displays the ports included in the group. 152 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Dynamic DNS Setup 12.1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 12.2 on page 153) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ADSL Router. 12.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your ADSL Routers DDNS. Click Network Setting > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 153 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 68 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 51 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup DESCRIPTION Active Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. Service Provider This is the website of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your ADSL Router by your Dynamic DNS provider. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Username Password Enable Wildcard Option Apply Cancel Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 154 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 13 Filters 13.1 Overview This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the ADSL Router. You can configure rules to restrict traffic by IP addresses, MAC addresses, IPv6 addresses and/or URLs. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens Use the IP/MAC Filter screen (Section 13.2 on page 155) to create IP and MAC filter rules. Use the IPv6/MAC Filter screen (Section 13.3 on page 157) to create IPv6 and MAC filter rules. 13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering URL The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for example http://www.zyxel.com. URL and IP Filter Structure The URL, IP and IPv6 filters have individual rule indexes. The ADSL Router allows you to configure each type of filter with its own respective set of rules. 13.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to create and apply IP and MAC filters. Click Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 155 Chapter 13 Filters Figure 69 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter DESCRIPTION LABEL Rule Type Rule Type selection Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to disallow. IP / MAC Filter Rule Editing IP / MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter rule. Active Interface Direction Rule Type Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule. Select the PVC to which to apply the filter. Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction. Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule. Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IP addresses. Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address. Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address 156 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 13 Filters Table 52 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Port Number DESCRIPTION Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Destination IP Address Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Subnet Mask Port Number Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address. Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Protocol Select ICMP, TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol. IP / MAC Filter Listing IP / MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box.
#
Active Interface Direction Src IP/Mask Dest IP/Mask Mac Address Src Port Dest Port Protocol Apply Delete Cancel This is the index number of the rule in a filter set. This field shows whether the rule is activated. This is the interface that the filter set applies to. The filter set applies to this traffic direction. This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule type. This is the destination IP address and subnet mask. This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered. This is the source port number. This is the destination port number. This is the upper layer protocol. Click this to apply your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 13.3 IPv6/MAC Filter Use this screen to create and apply IPv6 filters. Click Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 157 Chapter 13 Filters Figure 70 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter LABEL Rule Type DESCRIPTION Rule Type selection Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to block. IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Editing IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter rule. Active Interface Direction Rule Type Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule. Select the PVC to which to apply the filter. Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction. Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule. Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IPv6 addresses. Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address. Source IP Address Enter the source IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is ::. Source Prefix Length Enter the prefix length for the source IPv6 address 158 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 13 Filters Table 53 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Destination IPv6 Address DESCRIPTION Enter the destination IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is ::. Destination Prefix Length Enter the prefix length for the destination IPv6 address. ICMPv6 Type Select the ICMPv6 message type to filter. The following message types can be selected:
1 / Destination Unreachable: 0 - no route to destination; 1 -
communication with destination administratively prohibited; 3 - address unreachable; 4 - port unreachable 2 / Packet Too Big 3 / Time Exceeded: 0 - hop limit exceeded in transit; 1 - fragment reassembly time exceeded 4 / Parameter Problem: 0 - erroneous header field encountered; 1 -
unrecognized Next Header type encountered; 2 - unrecognized IPv6 option encountered 128 / Echo Request 129 / Echo Response 130 / Listener Query - Multicast listener query 131 / Listener Report - Multicast listener report 132 / Listener Done - Multicast listener done 143 / Listener Report v2 - Multicast listener report v2 133 / Router Solicitation 134 / Router Advertisement 135 / Neighbor Solicitation 136 / Neighbor Advertisement 137 / Redirect - Redirect message Protocol IPv6 / MAC Filter Listing This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. By default it is ICMPv6. IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box.
#
Active Interface Direction This is the index number of the rule in a filter set. This field shows whether the rule is activated. This is the interface that the rule applies to. The filter set applies to this traffic direction. ICMPv6 Type The ICMPv6 message type to filter. Src IP/PrefixLength This displays the source IPv6 address and prefix length. Dest IP/PrefixLength This displays the destination IPv6 address and prefix length. Mac Address Protocol Apply Delete Cancel This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered. This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. By default it is ICMPv6. Click this to apply your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 159 Chapter 13 Filters 160 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Firewall 14.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable the ADSL Router firewall. Use the firewall to protect your ADSL Router and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. The firewall:
allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. blocks SYN and port scanner attacks. By default, the ADSL Router blocks DDOS, LAND and Ping of Death attacks whether the firewall is enabled or disabled. The following figure illustrates the firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 71 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General screen (Section 14.2 on page 164) to select the firewall protection level on the ADSL Router. Use the Default Action screen (Section 14.3 on page 165) to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use the Rules screen (Section 14.4 on page 166) to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. Use the Dos screen (Section 14.5 on page 172) to set the thresholds that the ADSL Router uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 161 Chapter 14 Firewall 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-
ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The ADSL Router is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A Distributed DoS (DDoS) attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a Local Area Network Denial (LAND) attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. RFC 4890 SPEC Traffic RFC 4890 specifies the filtering policies for ICMPv6 messages. This is important for protecting against security threats including DoS, probing, redirection attacks and renumbering attacks that can be carried out through ICMPv6. Since ICMPv6 error messages are critical for establishing and maintaining communications, filtering policy focuses on ICMPv6 informational messages. 162 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall Anti-Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ADSL Router, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ADSL Router exists. The ADSL Router supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ADSL Router when unsupported ports are probed. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks, the ADSL Router uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 163 Chapter 14 Firewall 14.2 The Firewall General Screen Use this screen to select the firewall protection level on the ADSL Router. Click Security >
Firewall > General to display the following screen. Figure 72 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Security > Firewall > General LABEL High DESCRIPTION This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet. Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN service (Telnet, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, DNS, POP3, SMTP) is permitted. Medium This is the recommended setting. It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the Internet from accessing any services on your local network. Low This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access services on your local network. This would be used with Port Forwarding, Default Server. Custom This setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules. Firewall rules can be created in the Default Action screen (Section 14.3 on page 165) and Rules screen (Section 14.4 on page 166). Off This setting is not recommended. It disables firewall protection for your network and could potentially expose your network to significant security risks. This option should only be used for troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router. Apply Click this to save your changes. Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 164 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 14.3 The Default Action Screen Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Click Security > Firewall > Default Action to display the following screen. Figure 73 Security > Firewall > Default Action Chapter 14 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Security > Firewall > Default Action LABEL Packet Direction DESCRIPTION This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to Router, WAN to LAN). Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to the ADSL Router itself. Default Action Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules. Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender. Apply Cancel Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 165 Chapter 14 Firewall 14.4 The Rules Screen Click Security > Firewall > Rules to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Note: The firewall configuration screen shown in this section is specific to the following devices: P-The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. Figure 74 Security > Firewall > Rules The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Security > Firewall > Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION This read-only bar shows how much of the ADSL Router's memory for recording Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red. Packet Direction Create a new rule after rule number
#
Active Source IP Address Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules. Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure
(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule. This column displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. Destination IP Address This column displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. Service This column displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. See Appendix F on page 293 for more information. 166 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall Table 56 Security > Firewall > Rules DESCRIPTION LABEL This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards Action packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit). Source Interface Destination Interface This column displays the source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic entered the ADSL Router. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any. This column displays the destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the ADSL Router. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any. Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 14.4.1 The Rules Add Screen Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click Add or click a rules Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 167 Chapter 14 Firewall Figure 75 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this option to enable this firewall rule. Action for Matched Packets Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (Reject) or allow the passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule. IP Version Type Select the IP version, IPv4 or IPv6, to apply this firewall rule to. Rate Limit Maximum Burst Number Set a maximum number of packets per second, minute, or hour to limit the throughput of traffic that matches this rule. Set the maximum number of packets that can be sent at the peak rate. Log This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not. Rules/Destination Address 168 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall Table 57 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add LABEL Address Type DESCRIPTION Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?
Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address. Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here. End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. Source Mac Address Specify a source MAC address of traffic to which to apply this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source MAC address is equivalent to any. Source Interface Destination Interface Services Available Services Specify a source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic entered the ADSL Router. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any. Specify a destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the ADSL Router. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any. Please see Appendix F on page 293 for more information on services available. Select a service from the Available Services box. Edit Customized Service Click the Edit Customized Service button to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services. TCP Flag Schedule Apply Cancel Specify any TCP flag bits the firewall rule is to check for. Select the days and time during which to apply the rule. Select Everyday and All Day to always apply the rule. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 14.4.2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the ADSL Router. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix F on page 293 for some examples. Click the Edit Customized Services button while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen. Figure 76 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 169 Chapter 14 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port. Name Protocol This is the name of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized service. Port Type This is the port number or range that defines your customized service. Start Port End Port Modify Add Back This is a single port number or the starting port number of a range that defines your customized service. This is a single port number or the ending port number of a range that defines your customized service. Click this to edit a customized service. Click this to configure a customized service. Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen. 14.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click Add or the Edit icon next to a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen. Figure 77 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit LABEL Config DESCRIPTION Service Name Type a unique name for your custom port. Service Type Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box. Port Configuration Type Click Single to specify one port only or Port Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. 170 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall Table 59 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit LABEL Port Number DESCRIPTION Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Back Apply Cancel Delete Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to delete the current rule. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 171 Chapter 14 Firewall 14.5 The DoS Screen Use this screen to enable DoS protection. Click Security > Firewall > Dos to display the following screen. Figure 78 Security > Firewall > Dos The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Security > Firewall > Dos LABEL Denial of Services Enable this to protect against DoS attacks. The ADSL Router will drop sessions that DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Advanced surpass maximum thresholds. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to go to a screen to specify maximum thresholds at which the ADSL Router will start dropping sessions. 14.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen For DoS attacks, the ADSL Router uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established state-the TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed. Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN (synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK
(acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK
(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established. Figure 79 Three-Way Handshake For UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. An unusually high number
(or arrival rate) of half-open sessions could indicate a DOS attack. 172 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 14.5.1.1 Threshold Values If everything is working properly, you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the default threshold values should work for most small offices. Tune these parameters when you believe the ADSL Router has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the logs show that the ADSL Router is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:
Chapter 14 Firewall 1 2 3 The maximum number of opened sessions. The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network. The CPU power of servers in your LAN network. 4 Network bandwidth. 5 Type of traffic for certain servers. Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors
(especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy). If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey, its recommended that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small period of time and the ADSL Router may classify them as DoS attacks. 14.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds Click Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced to display the following screen. Figure 80 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 173 Chapter 14 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 61 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced LABEL TCP SYN-Request Count DESCRIPTION This is the rate of new TCP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. UDP Packet Count ICMP Echo-Request Count This is the rate of new UDP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. This is the rate of new ICMP Echo-Request half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. Back Apply Cancel Click this button to return to the previous screen. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 14.6 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 14.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the ADSL Routers default settings. The ADSL Router checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the ADSL Router takes the action specified in the rule. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:
LAN to Router LAN to WAN WAN to LAN WAN to Router Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN. By default, the ADSL Routers stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:
LAN to Router These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the ADSL Router (remote management). Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the ADSL Router. 174 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall LAN to WAN These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN. By default, the ADSL Routers stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions:
WAN to LAN These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN. Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN. WAN to Router By default the ADSL Router stops computers on the WAN from managing the ADSL Router. You could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the ADSL Router. Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the ADSL Router. You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so. For example, you may create rules to:
Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the ADSL Routers default rules. 14.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 6 7 8 Change the default password via web configurator. Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way. Limit who can access your router. 9 Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 10 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. 11 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 175 Chapter 14 Firewall 12 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 14.6.3 Security Considerations Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the ADSL Router and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them. Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:
1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?
2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?
3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?
Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 14.6.4 Triangle Route When the firewall is on, your ADSL Router acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the ADSL Router to protect your LAN against attacks. Figure 81 Ideal Firewall Setup LAN 1 2 WAN 14.6.4.1 The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You may have more than one connection to the Internet (through one or more ISPs). If an alternate gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the ADSL Routers LAN IP address), the triangle route (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe the triangle route problem. 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. 176 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 14 Firewall 2 3 The ADSL Router reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN. The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the ADSL Router. As a result, the ADSL Router resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Figure 82 Triangle Route Problem LAN 1 3 2 WAN ISP 1 ISP 2 14.6.4.2 Solving the Triangle Route Problem A If you have the ADSL Router allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the ADSL Router and its firewall protection. Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your ADSL Router supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the ADSL Router being the gateway for each logical network. Its like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the ADSL Router to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario. A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The ADSL Router reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. The reply from the WAN goes to the ADSL Router. The ADSL Router then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. 1 2 3 4 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 177 Chapter 14 Firewall Figure 83 IP Alias LAN 1 4 Subnet 1 WAN 2 3 A Subnet 2 ISP 1 ISP 2 178 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 15 Parental Control 15.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the ADSL Router performs parental control on a specific user. 15.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules. Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 84 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Security > Parental Control LABEL Parental Control DESCRIPTION Use this field to activate or deactivate parental control. Add new PCP Click this to create a new parental control rule.
#
Status This is the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. PCP Name This shows the name of the rule. Home Network User This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. Internet Access Schedule This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 179 Chapter 15 Parental Control Table 62 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL Website Blocked DESCRIPTION This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. Modify Apply Cancel Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 15.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 85 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule 180 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 15 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 63 Parental Control: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule. Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. Internet Access Schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the ADSL Router to perform parental control. Time of Day to Apply Enter the starting and ending time that the LAN user is allowed access. Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block, the ADSL Router prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Access, the ADSL Router blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Add new service Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule. Active This shows whether a configured service is activated or not. Service Name This shows the name of the rule. Protocol Port Modify This shows the protocol of the rule. This shows the port of the rule. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Blocked Site/URL Enter the URL of web sites or URL keywords to which the ADSL Router blocks access. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 181 Chapter 15 Parental Control 182 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 16 Certificate 16.1 Overview The ADSL Router can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the ADSL Routers CA-signed certificates
(Section 16.3 on page 183). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ADSL Router (Section 16.4 on page 185). 16.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the ADSL Router to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. Certificate File Format The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. 16.3 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the ADSL Routers summary list of certificates and certification requests. You can import the following certificates to your ADSL Router:
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 183 Chapter 16 Certificate Web Server - This certificate secures HTTP connections. SSH - This certificate secures remote connections. Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. Figure 86 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL WebServer DESCRIPTION Click Browse... to find the certificate file you want to upload. Current File Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Cert SSH This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Type in the location of the SSH certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. 184 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 16 Certificate Table 64 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates (continued) LABEL Key Type DESCRIPTION This field applies to the SSH certificate. Replace Reset This shows the file format of the current certificate. Click this to replace the certificate(s) and save your changes back to the ADSL Router. Click this to clear your settings. 16.4 The Trusted CA Screen Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ADSL Router to accept as trusted. The ADSL Router accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Figure 87 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 65 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the ADSL Router. Name Subject Type Action This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State
(ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Click Remove to delete the certificate. 16.5 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen. You can save a trusted certification authoritys certificate to the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 185 Chapter 16 Certificate Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. Figure 88 Trusted CA > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import LABEL Certificate File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Apply Back Click Apply to save the certificate on the ADSL Router. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 16.6 View Certificate Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the ADSL Router to check a certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen. Figure 89 Trusted CA: View 186 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 16 Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Trusted CA: View LABEL Certificate Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). Certificate Detail This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Back Click this to return to the previous screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 187 Chapter 16 Certificate 188 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Logs 17.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ADSL Router log and then display the logs or have the ADSL Router send them to an administrator
(as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (Section 17.2 on page 190). 17.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 68 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. 1 2 3 4 5 Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 189 Chapter 17 Logs Table 68 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 6 SEVERITY Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. 7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 17.2 The System Log Screen Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop-down list box. Figure 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 69 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ADSL Router searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Refresh Click this to renew the log screen. Clear Logs Click this to delete all the logs. Export Click this to download logs to a file on your computer. Email Log Now
#
Time Level Click this to send logs to a specified e-mail address. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. Message This field states the reason for the log. 190 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 18 Traffic Status 18.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN interfaces and NAT. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 18.2 on page 191) . Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 18.3 on page 192). Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the ADSL Routers client(s) (Section 18.4 on page 193). 18.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. You can view the WAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 91 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the WAN interface of the ADSL Router. Refresh Interval Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down list box. Connected Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 191 Chapter 18 Traffic Status Table 70 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN (continued) LABEL Packets Sent DESCRIPTION Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 18.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 92 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 71 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval(s) DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-
down list box. Set Interval Stop Interface Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. 192 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 18 Traffic Status Table 71 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN (continued) LABEL Sent (Packet) DESCRIPTION Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packet) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 18.4 The NAT Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. You can view the NAT status of the ADSL Routers client(s) in this screen. Figure 93 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL Refresh Interval Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down list DESCRIPTION box. Set Interval Stop Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. Device Name This shows the name of the client. IP Address This shows the IP address of the client. MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the client. No. of Open Session This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 193 Chapter 18 Traffic Status 194 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 19 User Account 19.1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen. 19.2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system password. Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 94 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Maintenance > User Account LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION You can configure the password for the Power User and Admin accounts. Old Password New Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the ADSL Router. Retype to Confirm Apply Cancel Type the new password again for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 195 Chapter 19 User Account 196 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 20 TR-069 Client 20.1 Overview The ADSL Router supports TR-069 Amendment 1 (CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2.0) and TR-069 Amendment 2 (CPE WAN Management Protocol v1.1, Release 3.0). TR-069 is a protocol that defines how your ADSL Router (ZD) can be managed via a management server (MS) such as ZyXELs Vantage Access. Figure 95 LAN and WAN ZD MS An administrator can use a management server to remotely set up the ADSL Router, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ADSL Router. In order to use CWMP, you need to configure the following steps:
1 2 3 Activate CWMP Specify the URL, username and password. Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value. 20.2 The TR-069 Client Screen Use this screen to configure your ADSL Router to be managed by a management server. Click Matinenance > TR-069 Client to display the following screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 197 Chapter 20 TR-069 Client Figure 96 Maintenance > TR-069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Maintenance > TR-069 Client LINK CWMP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to allow the ADSL Router to be managed by a management server or select Disable to not allow the ADSL Router to be managed by a management server. ACS URL Type the IP address or domain name of the management server. If the ADSL Router is behind a NAT router that assigns it a private IP address, you will have to configure a NAT port forwarding rule on the NAT router. ACS User Name The user name is used to authenticate the ADSL Router when making a connection to the ACS Password Connection Request Path Connection Request Port Connection Request UserName Connection Request Password Inform management server. This user name on the management server and the ADSL Router must be the same. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-
language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. The password is used to authenticate the ADSL Router when making a connection to the management server. This password on the management server and the ADSL Router must be the same. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-
language keyboard. Type the IP address or domain name of the ADSL Router. The management server uses this path to verify the ADSL Router. The default port for access to the ADSL Router from the management server is port 7547. If you change it, make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is recommended to use a port number above 1024 (not a commonly used port). The management server should use this port to connect to the ADSL Router. You may need to alter your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured. The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the ADSL Router. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-
language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the ADSL Router. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Spaces are not allowed. Select Enable to have the ADSL Router periodically send information to the management server (recommended if CWMP is enabled) or select Disable to not have the ADSL Router periodically send information to the management server Inform Interval The interval is the duration in seconds for which the ADSL Router must attempt to connect with the management server to send information and check for configuration updates. Enter a value between 1 and 86400 seconds. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 198 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 20 TR-069 Client P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 199 Chapter 20 TR-069 Client 200 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 21 System Settings 21.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens Use the System screen (Section 21.2 on page 201) to configure system settings. Use the Time Setting screen (Section 21.3 on page 201) to set the system time. 21.2 The System Screen Use this screen to configure system admin password. Click Maintenance > System to open the screen as shown. Figure 97 Maintenance > System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Maintenance > System LABEL DESCRIPTION Type how many seconds a management session (either via the web configurator) can be Administrator left idle before the session times out and you have to log in again. Very long idle timeouts Inactivity Timer may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 21.3 The Time Screen Use this screen to configure the ADSL Routers time based on your local time zone. To change your ADSL Routers time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time. The screen appears as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 201 Chapter 21 System Settings Figure 98 Maintenance > System > Time The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 76 Maintenance > System > Time LABEL Current Date/Time DESCRIPTION Current Time This field displays the time and date of your ADSL Router. Each time you reload this page, the ADSL Router synchronizes the time and date with the time server. Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. Current Date/Time This field displays the last updated time (in hh:mm:ss format) from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. Current Time This field displays the last updated date (in yyyy/mm/dd format) from the time server or the last date configured manually. Get from Time Server Time Server Address 1/2 Time Zone Setup Time Zone When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the ADSL Router get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). 202 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 21 System Settings Table 76 Maintenance > System > Time (continued) LABEL Daylight Savings DESCRIPTION Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
End Date Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 203 Chapter 21 System Settings 204 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 22 Firmware Upgrade 22.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ADSL Router. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ADSL Router. 22.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the ADSL Router while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 99 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version. File Path Browse... Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ADSL Router again. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 205 Chapter 22 Firmware Upgrade Figure 100 Firmware Uploading The ADSL Router automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 101 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 102 Error Message 206 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Backup/Restore 23.1 Overview The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 23.2 The Backup/Restore Screen Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 103 Maintenance > Backup/Restore Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ADSL Routers current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ADSL Router is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the ADSL Routers current configuration to your computer. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 207 Chapter 23 Backup/Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ADSL Router. Table 78 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Upload Reset Click this to begin the upload process. Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default. Do not turn off the ADSL Router while configuration file upload is in progress. After the ADSL Router configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the ADSL Router. The ADSL Router automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 104 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you restore the default configuration, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 233 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ADSL Router to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 105 Reset Warning Message Wait until the ADSL Routers login screen appears. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ADSL Router. Refer to Section 1.5 on page 18 for more information on the RESET button. 208 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 23 Backup/Restore 23.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the ADSL Router remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the ADSL Router hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click the Reboot button to have the ADSL Router reboot. This does not affect the ADSL Router's configuration. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 209 Chapter 23 Backup/Restore 210 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Remote Management 24.1 Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which ADSL Router interface (if any) from which computers. The following figure shows remote management of the ADSL Router coming in from the WAN. Figure 106 Remote Management From the WAN LAN WAN HTTP Telnet Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a IP filter rule to allow access. You may manage your ADSL Router from a remote location via:
Internet (WAN only) LAN only LAN and WAN None (Disable) To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Service Access field. 24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen (Section 24.2 on page 212) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ADSL Router. Use the Telnet screen (Section 24.3 on page 214) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ADSL Router. Use the FTP screen (Section 24.4 on page 214) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 211 Chapter 24 Remote Management Your ADSL Router can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ADSL Router through the network. Use the SNMP screen (see Section 24.5 on page 215) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to access the ADSL Router. Use the DNS screen (Section 24.6 on page 217) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ADSL Router. Use the ICMP screen (Section 24.7 on page 218) to set whether or not your ADSL Router will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. Use the SSH screen (Section 24.8 on page 219) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SSH to manage the ADSL Router. 24.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when:
You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the ADSL Router will disconnect the session immediately. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:
Use the ADSL Routers WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the ADSL Routers LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 24.2 The WWW Screen Use this screen to specify how to connect to the ADSL Router from a web browser, such as Internet Explorer. 24.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT to display the WWW screen. 212 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 107 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW Chapter 24 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router using HTTP or HTTPS. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this service. Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL Router using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the ADSL Router using this service. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 213 Chapter 24 Remote Management 24.3 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the ADSL Routers command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown. Figure 108 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 80 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this service. Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL Router using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the ADSL Router using this service. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 24.4 The FTP Screen You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the ADSL Routers firmware and configuration files. Please see the Users Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. 214 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 24 Remote Management Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come. To change your ADSL Routers FTP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT >
FTP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 109 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this service. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL Router using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the ADSL Router using this service. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 24.5 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your ADSL Router supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ADSL Router through the network. The ADSL Router supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 215 Chapter 24 Remote Management Figure 110 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the ADSL Router). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. 24.5.1 Configuring SNMP To change your ADSL Routers SNMP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. 216 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 111 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP Chapter 24 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 82 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the port the SNMP agent listens on. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this service. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the ADSL Router. Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent. Get Community Set Community Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the ADSL Router using this service. Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes back to the ADSL Router. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. 24.6 The DNS Screen Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Use this screen to set from which IP address the ADSL Router will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your ADSL Routers DNS settings. This feature is not available when the P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 217 Chapter 24 Remote Management ADSL Router is set to bridge mode. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS to change your ADSL Routers DNS settings. Figure 112 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 83 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Access Status Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the ADSL Router. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the ADSL Router. Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ADSL Router. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to send DNS queries to the ADSL Router. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 24.7 The ICMP Screen To change your ADSL Routers security settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP. The screen appears as shown. If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ADSL Router, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ADSL Router exists. Your ADSL Router supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ADSL Router when unsupported ports are probed. Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services, you will also need to configure the firewall accordingly by disabling SPI. 218 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 113 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP Chapter 24 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 84 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP LABEL Respond to Ping on The ADSL Router will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is DESCRIPTION selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send Ping requests to the ADSL Router. Select All to allow any computer to send Ping requests to the ADSL Router. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to send Ping requests to the ADSL Router. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 24.8 The SSH Screen You can use Secure SHell (SSH) to securely access the ADSL Routers command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come. SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH tab to display the screen as shown. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 219 Chapter 24 Remote Management Figure 114 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this service. Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL Router using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the ADSL Router using this service. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 24.8.1 SSH Example This section shows an example using a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the ZyXEL device. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program users guide. 1 Enter the IP address and port number. Select SSH. 220 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 24 Remote Management 2 A window displays prompting you to store the host key in your computer. Click Yes to continue. 3 Enter your user name and password. 4 The command line interface displays. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 221 Chapter 24 Remote Management 222 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 25 Diagnostic 25.1 Overview These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ADSL Router. 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens Use the Ping screen (Section 25.2 on page 223) to ping an IP address. Use the DSL Line screen (Section 25.3 on page 224) to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. 25.2 The General Screen Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping to open the screen shown next. Figure 115 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 86 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. Ping PingV6 TracerouteV6 Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. Click this to ping the IPv6 address that you entered. Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the ADSL Router to the IPv6 address that you entered. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 223 Chapter 25 Diagnostic 25.3 The DSL Line Screen Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. Click Maintenance >
Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next. Figure 116 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 87 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line LABEL ATM Status DESCRIPTION Click this to view your DSL connections Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-
size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells. It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets. These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up. inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received. inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected. inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and Management (OAM) F4 cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more on OAM for ATM. inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received. outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent. outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected. outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent. outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent. ATM Loopback Test Click this to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The ADSL Router sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the ADSL Router. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network. 224 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 87 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued) LABEL DSL Line Status DESCRIPTION Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections. Chapter 25 Diagnostic noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection (coming into the ADSL Router from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is. output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the ADSL Router is using to transmit to the ISP. attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal coming into the ADSL Router from the ISP. Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a lines bandwidth into sub-carriers
(sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the lines bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT. The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels. Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:
"Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F/W... Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"
Reset ADSL Line P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 225 Chapter 25 Diagnostic 226 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ADSL Router Access and Login Internet Access 26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The ADSL Router does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the ADSL Router is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ADSL Router. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ADSL Router and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the ADSL Router off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 27.1 on page 231. 2 3 4 5 Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the ADSL Router off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 227 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting 26.2 ADSL Router Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the ADSL Router. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ADSL Router by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ADSL Router (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page 18. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin user name and password can be found on the cover of this Users Guide. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page 18. I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 111), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the ADSL Router. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 261. 4 5 228 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ADSL Router with the default IP address. See Section 1.5 on page 18. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Chapter 26 Troubleshooting Try to access the ADSL Router using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ADSL Router, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ADSL Router does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the DSL port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ADSL Router. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default user and default admin password can be found on the cover page of this Users Guide. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ADSL Router. Log out of the ADSL Router in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the ADSL Router off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page 18. I cannot Telnet to the ADSL Router. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 26.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 231. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-
sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 229 Chapter 26 Troubleshooting 3 4 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and have selected the correct country and channel in which your ADSL Router operates in the Wireless LAN > AP screen. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ADSL Router), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 231. Turn the ADSL Router off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 3 4 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 27.1 on page 231. If the ADSL Router is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the ADSL Router if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). Turn the ADSL Router off and on. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 230 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide CHAPTER 27 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ADSL Routers hardware and firmware features. 27.1 Hardware Specifications
. Table 88 LED Descriptions LED COLOR Green
(POWER) Red LAN 1-4 Green Green
(WPS/WLAN) Orange
(DSL)
(INTERNET) Green Green Red STATUS On Blinking On Off On DESCRIPTION The ADSL Router is receiving power and ready for use. The ADSL Router is self-testing. The ADSL Router detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The ADSL Router is not receiving power. The ADSL Router has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The ADSL Router is sending/receiving data to /from the LAN. Off On Blinking Blinking Off On The ADSL Router does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The wireless network is activated. The ADSL Router is communicating with other wireless clients. The ADSL Router is setting up a WPS connection. The wireless network is not activated. The DSL line is up. Blinking The ADSL Router is initializing the DSL line. Off On The DSL line is down. The ADSL Router has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. Blinking The ADSL Router is sending or receiving IP traffic. On Off The ADSL Router attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The ADSL Router does not have an IP connection. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 231 Chapter 27 Product Specifications Table 89 LED Descriptions LED POWER COLOR Green STATUS On DESCRIPTION The ADSL Router is receiving power and ready for use. Red ETHERNET 1-
4 Green WPS/WLAN Green Orange DSL Green Blinking The ADSL Router is self-testing. On Off On The ADSL Router detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The ADSL Router is power off. The ADSL Router has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). Blinking The ADSL Router is transmitting data to or receiving data from the LAN. Off On Blinking Blinking Off On The ADSL Router does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The wireless network is activated. The ADSL Router is communicating with other wireless clients. The ADSL Router is setting up a WPS connection. The wireless network is not activated. The DSL line is up. Blinking The ADSL Router is initializing the DSL line. INTERNET Green Off On The DSL line is down. The ADSL Router has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. Blinking The ADSL Router is sending or receiving IP traffic. Red On Off The ADSL Router attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed, no IP address from IPCP. The ADSL Router does not have an IP connection. 232 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX A Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ADSL Routers LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 117 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 233 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:
In the Network window, click Add. Select Adapter and then click Add. Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:
In the Network window, click Add. Select Protocol and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
Click Add. Select Client and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Configuring 1 2 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. 234 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 118 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 119 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 4 Click the Gateway tab. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 235 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 6 7 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 2 3 Click Start and then Run. In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 120 Windows XP: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 236 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 121 Windows XP: Control Panel Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 122 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 237 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 123 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 124 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 238 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. Figure 125 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 239 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 126 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0. 1 Click the Start icon, Control Panel. 240 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 127 Windows Vista: Start Menu Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet. Figure 128 Windows Vista: Control Panel 3 4 Click Network and Sharing Center. Figure 129 Windows Vista: Network And Internet Click Manage network connections. Figure 130 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 241 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. Figure 131 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. Figure 132 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. 242 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 133 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 243 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 134 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 9 In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. 244 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 135 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 12 Close the Network Connections window. 13 Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 245 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 136 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 137 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 246 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your ADSL Router in the Router address box. 5 6 7 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 2 3 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 138 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 247 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 139 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 5 6 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your ADSL Router in the Router address box. Click Apply Now and close the window. Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Linux 248 This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 140 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 141 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 249 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 5 6 7 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 142 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS Click the Devices tab. Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 143 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 250 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 144 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 145 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 2 3 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 146 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 147 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 251 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 148 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
252 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 253 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 149 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 90 Subnet Masks 1ST OCTET:
(192) IP Address (Binary) 11000000 2ND OCTET:
(168) 10101000 3RD OCTET:
(1) 00000001 4TH OCTET
(2) 00000010 Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. 254 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 91 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 8-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 3RD OCTET 00000000 4TH OCTET DECIMAL 00000000 255.0.0.0 16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0 24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0 29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 92 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK 8 bits HOST ID SIZE 24 bits 255.0.0.0 16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 24 bits 255.255.255.0 29 bits 255.255.255.24 8 8 bits 3 bits Notation 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a /
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 93 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/24 LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 0000 0000 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 0
/25
/26 1000 0000 1100 0000 128 192 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 255 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 93 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued) LAST OCTET
(BINARY) 1110 0000 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION
/27 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.224 LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL) 224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
/28
/29
/30 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 240 248 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 150 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-
networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-
networks, A and B. 256 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 151 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 94 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 257 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 95 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address 192.168.1. IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127 Table 96 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 10000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191 Table 97 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000 11000000 Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255 Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 98 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS 0 SUBNET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 FIRST ADDRESS 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 LAST ADDRESS 30 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 258 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 99 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 255.255.255.128 (/25) SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS 2 4 8 16 32 64 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 2 3 4 5 6 7 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 100 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 SUBNET MASK 255.255.128.0 (/17) 2 NO. SUBNETS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ADSL Router. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 259 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ADSL Router that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ADSL Router will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ADSL Router unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 260 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 152 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 261 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 153 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. 262 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 154 Internet Options: Privacy 3 4 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 155 Pop-up Blocker Settings P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 263 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 156 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. 264 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 157 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 265 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 158 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 159 Java (Sun) 266 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 160 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 161 Mozilla Firefox Content Security P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 267 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 268 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 162 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 269 Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 163 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. 270 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Figure 164 Infrastructure WLAN Appendix D Wireless LANs Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 271 Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 165 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. 272 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ADSL Router uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 101 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the ADSL Router are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ADSL Router identity. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 273 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ADSL Router. Table 102 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ADSL Router and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. 274 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 275 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-
side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. 276 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 103 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes EAP-MD5 No Mutual Authentication EAP-TTLS Yes PEAP Yes Optional Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Strong Strong Moderate Hard No Moderate Moderate Moderate Yes Yes No Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty No No No None Easy Client Identity Protection No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 277 Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. 278 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 4 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 166 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 279 Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 167 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 104 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Yes Yes No Yes No Yes TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. 280 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 281 Appendix D Wireless LANs 282 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX E IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 105 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 283 Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. Unspecified Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. Loopback Address A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. Multicast Address In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 106 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 107 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 284 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 107 Reserved Multicast Address (continued) Appendix E IPv6 MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Interface ID In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00 : 13
: 49
: 12
: 34
: 56 EUI-64 02 : 13
: 49
: FF
: FE
: 12
: 34
: 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80). When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the ADSL Router is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 285 Appendix E IPv6 address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP address. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, 3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses. 286 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The ADSL Router uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the ADSL Router passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. Transition Techniques IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to be used. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 287 Appendix E IPv6 On the ADSL Router, you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The following describes each method. Configured Tunnel A configured tunnel is a point-to-point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address with an IPv4 address. Routers (A and B) on both IPv6 networks (1 and 2) each must have an interface that connects to the IPv4 network (with an IPv4 address). This allows the router to send and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network. In this case, you must specify Bs public IPv4 address on A (similarly, specify As public IPv4 address on B) in order for packets to arrive at the intended destination through the IPv4 network. Figure 168 Configured Tunnel Example 6to4 Tunnel A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6 networks across an IPv4 network. To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network, the IPv6 packets are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets. The following figure shows a network example. Figure 169 6to4 Relay Router Network Example In a 6to4 tunnel, 6to4 routers (A and B in the example network) forward these packets between IPv6 networks (1 and 2) over the IPv4 Internet. A 6to4 relay router (C) connects to both an IPv6 and IPv4 network. A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4 Internet and an IPv6 device (Z) on the IPv6 Internet. To transmit packets, a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002:: to encode a given IPv4 address. A 6to4 address has the following format:
2002:IPv4 address:subnet ID:host ID/64 288 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 For example, if you have an IPv4 address of 192.168.1.1 (first converted to binary notation and then to the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8:0101), then the 6to4 addresses is 2002:c0a8:0101::1/
64. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1 2 3 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 289 Appendix E IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. Click OK to save the change. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 1 2 3 290 Appendix E IPv6 4 5 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :
IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 291 Appendix E IPv6 292 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX F Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 293 Appendix F Services Table 108 Examples of Services PROTOCOL NAME AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICQ TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined UDP IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NetBIOS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. 294 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Table 108 Examples of Services (continued) Appendix F Services PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 5190 DESCRIPTION An Internet chat program. NAME NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP TCP UDP TCP 144 2049 119 User-Defined 1 TCP TCP TCP 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN TCP TCP TCP TCP ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP RTELNET RTSP TCP TCP/UDP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP SNMP-TRAPS TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 295 Appendix F Services Table 108 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SQL-NET PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 1521 SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP UDP 1900 22 1558 514 49 23 7000 user-
defined DESCRIPTION Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. 296 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n(20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n(40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
!
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 297 Appendix G Legal Information Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Viewing Certifications Go to www.zyxel.com to view the products documents and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC
(R&TTE Directive)
[Czech]
[Danish]
[German]
[Estonian]
English
[Spanish]
[Greek]
[French]
[Italian]
[Latvian]
ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ZyXEL 1999/5/C. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
[Lithuanian]
iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
[Dutch]
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. 298 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information
[Maltese]
[Hungarian]
[Polish]
[Portuguese]
[Slovenian]
[Slovak]
[Finnish]
[Swedish]
[Bulgarian]
[Icelandic]
[Norwegian]
[Romanian]
Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL , 1999/5/C. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries,the 2,4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs:. Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Frequency Band (MHz) Max Power Level
(EIRP)1 (mW) 2400-2483.5 5150-5350 5470-5725 100 200 1000 Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor V V V Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 299 Appendix G Legal Information France For 2.4 GHz, the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2.4 GHz band. Check http://www.arcep.fr/ for more details. Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est limite 10 mW en p.i.r.e. pour les quipements utiliss en extrieur dans la bande 2454 -
2483.5 MHz. Il n'y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en intrieur ou dans d'autres parties de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consultez http://
www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus amples dtails. R&TTE 1999/5/EC WLAN 2.4 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Location Indoor (No restrictions) Outdoor Frequency Range(GHz) 2.4 2.4835 2.4 2.454 2.454 2.4835 Power (EIRP) 100mW (20dBm) 100mW (20dBm) 10mW (10dBm) Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. 300 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Index Index Numbers 802.1p 136 A activation CWMP 198 dynamic DNS 154 DYNDNS wildcard 154 NAT 140 port binding 150 port forwarding 143 QoS 129 SSID 86 wireless LAN scheduling 93 WPS 89 address mapping types 146 administrator password 21 alternative subnet mask notation 255 antenna directional 281 gain 281 omni-directional 281 anti-probing 163 AP (access point) 271 applications, NAT 146 Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM ATM 224 MBS 69, 72 PCR 68, 72 QoS 68, 72, 76 SCR 68, 72 status 224 authentication 96, 98 RADIUS server 98 automatic logout 21 B backup configuration 207 Basic Service Set, See BSS 269 Basic Service Set, see BSS broadcast 64 BSS 99, 269 example 99 C CA 183, 276 CBR 68, 72, 76 certificate factory default 184 Certificate Authority See CA. certificates 183 authentication 183 CA public key 183 replacing 184 storage space 184 trusted CAs 185 Certification Authority 183 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 297 notices 298 viewing 298 channel 271 interference 271 channel, wireless LAN 96 CLI 15 client list 113 Command Line Interface, see CLI compatibility, WDS 91 configuration backup 207 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 301 Index CWMP 197 DHCP 112 IP alias 115 IP precedence 134 IP/MAC filter 156 port forwarding 141 reset 208 restoring 208 static route 124, 126 WAN 64 connection nailed-up 75 copyright 297 CPE WAN Management Protocol, see CWMP CTS (Clear to Send) 272 customized services 169, 170 CWMP 197 activation 198 configuration 197 D data fragment threshold 94, 96 DDoS 162 default LAN IP address 21 default server address 144 default server, NAT 141 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 60, 110, 112, 119 diagnostic 223 DiffServ Code Point, see DSCP digital IDs 183 disclaimer 297 DMZ 144 DNS 110, 119, 217 documentation related 2 Domain Name System, see DNS DoS 162 three-way handshake 172 thresholds 163, 172, 173 DSCP 134 DSL connections, status 225 dynamic DNS 153 activation 154 wildcard 153 activation 154 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 276 DYNDNS wildcard 153 activation 154 E EAP Authentication 275 encapsulation 63, 66, 71 ENET ENCAP 73 PPPoA 74 PPPoE 73 RFC 1483 74 encryption 98, 277 ENET ENCAP 66, 71, 73 ESS 270 Extended Service Set IDentification 81, 87 Extended Service Set, See ESS 270 F FCC interference statement 297 filters 155 IP/MAC 155 structure 155 IP/MAC filter configuration 156 MAC address 88, 97 URL 155 firewalls 161 actions 168 address types 169 anti-probing 163 customized services 169, 170 DDoS 162 default action 165 DoS 162 thresholds 163, 172, 173 ICMP 163 LAND attack 162 logs 168 302 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide P2P 173 packet direction 165 Ping of Death 162 rules 174 security 175 SYN attack 162 three-way handshake 172 triangle route 176 solutions 177 firmware 205 forwarding ports 140, 141 activation 143 configuration 141 example 141 rules 142 fragmentation threshold 94, 96, 272 FTP 15, 214 G Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 271 host 195 host name 59 I IANA 260 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 269 ICMP 163, 218 IEEE 802.11g 273 IGA 144 IGMP 64, 112, 121 ILA 144 importing trusted CAs 185 Independent Basic Service Set Index See IBSS 269 initialization vector (IV) 278 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP address 59, 63, 66, 71, 74, 109, 120 default 21 default server 141 ping 223 private 120 IP alias 114 configuration 115 NAT applications 146 IP precedence 134, 136 configuration 134 IP/MAC filter 155 configuration 156 structure 155 IPv6 283 addressing 283 EUI-64 285 global address 284 interface ID 285 link-local address 283 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 283 ping 283 prefix 283 prefix length 283 stateless autoconfiguration 285 unspecified address 284 L LAN 109 client list 113 DHCP 110, 112, 119 DNS 110, 119 IGMP 121 IP address 109, 111, 120 IP alias 114 configuration 115 MAC address 113 multicast 112, 121 RIP 121 subnet mask 110, 120 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 303 Index LAND attack 162 limitations wireless LAN 99 WPS 106 Local Area Network, see LAN login passwords 21 logout 21 automatic 21 logs 189 firewalls 168 M MAC 59 MAC address 88, 113 filter 88, 97 MAC authentication 88 Management Information Base (MIB) 216 managing the device using FTP. See FTP. mapping address types 146 Maximum Burst Size, see MBS Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU MBS 69, 72, 76 MBSSID 100 Media Access Control, see MAC Address MLD proxy 68 model name 59 MTU 69, 73 multicast 64, 68, 112, 121 IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 66, 71, 74 LLC-based 74 VC-based 74 N nailed-up connection 67, 75 NAT 71, 139, 144, 145, 259 activation 140 304 address mapping types 146 applications 146 IP alias 146 default server IP address 141 example 146 global 145 IGA 144 ILA 144 inside 145 local 145 outside 145 P2P 140 port forwarding 140, 141 activation 143 configuration 141 example 141 rules 142 remote management 212 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation, see NAT network map 24 O other documentation 2 P P2P 140, 173 packet direction 165 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 278, 279 passwords 21 PBC 101 PCR 68, 72, 75 Peak Cell Rate, see PCR PIN, WPS 101 example 103 Ping of Death 162 port binding 149 activation 150 summary screen 151 port forwarding 140, 141 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide activation 143 configuration 141 example 141 rules 142 PPPoA 66, 71, 74 PPPoE 66, 71, 73 preamble 94, 96 preamble mode 273 private IP address 120 probing, firewalls 163 product registration 298 PSK 278 push button 17 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 101 Q QoS 127 802.1p 136 activation 129 DSCP 134 example 127 IP precedence 134, 136 priority queue 137 Quality of Service, see QoS Quick Start Guide 2, 21 R RADIUS 274 message types 275 messages 275 shared secret key 275 RADIUS server 98 registration product 298 related documentation 2 remote management 211 DNS 217 FTP 214 ICMP 218 limitations 212 Index NAT 212 SSH 219 Telnet 214 WWW 212 reset 18, 208 restart 209 restoring configuration 208 RFC 1483 66, 71, 74 RFC 3164 189 RIP 68, 121 Routing Information Protocol, see RIP RTS (Request To Send) 272 threshold 271, 272 rules, port forwarding 142 S schedules wireless LAN 93 SCR 68, 72, 75 security network 175 wireless LAN 96 Security Parameter Index, see SPI Service Set 81, 87 setup DHCP 112 IP alias 115 IP precedenceQoS IP precedence 134 IP/MAC filter 156 port forwarding 141 static route 124, 126 WAN 64 shaping traffic 75, 76 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP SNMP 215 agents 216 Manager 216 managers 216 MIB 216 network components 216 versions 215 SPI 162 SSH 219 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 305 Index SSID 97 activation 86 MBSSID 100 static route 123 configuration 124, 126 example 123 status 57 ATM 224 DSL connections 225 WPS 90 subnet 253 subnet mask 110, 120, 254 subnetting 256 Sustain Cell Rate, see SCR SYN attack 162 syslog protocol 189 severity levels 189 system 201 firmware 205 passwords 21 reset 18 status 57 time 201 System Info 58 system name 59 T Telnet 214 three-way handshake 172 thresholds data fragment 94, 96 DoS 163, 172, 173 P2P 173 time 201 TR-069 15 trademarks 297 traffic shaping 75 example 76 triangle route 176 solutions 177 trusted CAs, and certificates 185 U UBR 68, 72, 77 unicast 64 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 205 UPnP 114 cautions 110 NAT traversal 110 URL 155 URL filter URL 155 V VBR 76 VBR-nRT 68, 72, 76 VBR-RT 68, 72, 76 VCI 66, 71, 74 version firmware version 59 Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI VPI 66, 71, 74 W WAN 63 ATM QoS 68, 72, 76 encapsulation 63, 66, 71 IGMP 64 IP address 63, 66, 71, 74 mode 66, 71 MTU 69, 73 multicast 64, 68 multiplexing 66, 71, 74 nailed-up connection 67, 75 NAT 71 RIP 68 setup 64 traffic shaping 75 example 76 VCI 66, 71, 74 306 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide Index PIN 101 push button 17, 101 status 90 wireless security 273 Wireless tutorial 32 WLAN interference 271 security parameters 280 WPA 98, 277 key caching 278 pre-authentication 278 user authentication 278 vs WPA-PSK 278 wireless client supplicant 278 with RADIUS application example 279 WPA2 277 user authentication 278 vs WPA2-PSK 278 wireless client supplicant 278 with RADIUS application example 279 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 277 WPA2-PSK 277, 278 application example 279 WPA-PSK 98, 277, 278 application example 279 WPS 89, 100, 103 activation 89 example 104 limitations 106 PIN 101 example 103 push button 17, 101 status 90 VPI 66, 71, 74 warranty 298 note 298 WDS 90, 100 compatibility 91 example 100 Web Configurator 21 web configurator 15 passwords 21 WEP 98 WEP Encryption 83, 84 WEP encryption 82 WEP key 82 Wide Area Network, see WAN Wi-Fi Protected Access 277 WiFi Protected Setup, see WPS wireless client configuration 35 wireless client WPA supplicants 278 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN 79, 95 authentication 96, 98 BSS 99 example 99 channel 96 encryption 98 example 95 fragmentation threshold 94, 96 limitations 99 MAC address filter 88, 97 MBSSID 100 preamble 94, 96 RADIUS server 98 scheduling 93 security 96 SSID 97 activation 86 WDS 90, 100 compatibility 91 example 100 WEP 98 WPA 98 WPA-PSK 98 WPS 89, 100, 103 activation 89 example 104 limitations 106 P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 Users Guide 307
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2014-09-03 | 2422 ~ 2452 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
| 2 | 2013-01-02 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 | Effective |
2014-09-03
|
||||
| 1 2 |
2013-01-02
|
|||||
| 1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
| 1 2 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@micomlabs.com
|
||||
| 1 2 |
t******@siemic.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
P660HNT1AV2
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Name |
E******** B********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
Teleconformity
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
M****** K******
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
Rietven 31
|
||||
| 1 2 |
Enschede, Overyssel, 7534NH
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Netherlands
|
|||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
(31)8********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
(31)8********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
m******@teleconformity.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway | ||||
| 1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
| 1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
| 1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Grant Comments | Power Output listed is Conducted. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a device, except in accordance with accepted multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device is capable of both 20MHz and 40 MHz bandwidths. | ||||
| 1 2 | Power listed is conducted RF output power. Device contains both 20 and 40MHz. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons. End-Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology (SuZhou) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
M****** C********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
86-05******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
86-05********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2 | 2412 | 2462 | 0.1795 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 15C | 2 | 2422 | 2452 | 0.1609 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.1794700 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC